WO2021213512A1 - A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions - Google Patents

A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021213512A1
WO2021213512A1 PCT/CN2021/089415 CN2021089415W WO2021213512A1 WO 2021213512 A1 WO2021213512 A1 WO 2021213512A1 CN 2021089415 W CN2021089415 W CN 2021089415W WO 2021213512 A1 WO2021213512 A1 WO 2021213512A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
composition
pharmaceutically acceptable
ophthalmic
compound
months
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2021/089415
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Guangxi ZANG
Gen LI
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Guangzhou Kangrui Biological Pharmaceutical Technology Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Guangzhou Kangrui Biological Pharmaceutical Technology Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to CA3173676A priority Critical patent/CA3173676A1/en
Priority to KR1020227041397A priority patent/KR102912349B1/en
Priority to CN202180030232.XA priority patent/CN115484957B/en
Priority to EP21792973.6A priority patent/EP4138841B1/en
Priority to US17/921,055 priority patent/US20230301904A1/en
Priority to NZ794298A priority patent/NZ794298B2/en
Application filed by Guangzhou Kangrui Biological Pharmaceutical Technology Co Ltd filed Critical Guangzhou Kangrui Biological Pharmaceutical Technology Co Ltd
Priority to JP2022564239A priority patent/JP7601903B2/en
Priority to AU2021260669A priority patent/AU2021260669B2/en
Publication of WO2021213512A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021213512A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Priority to JP2024163486A priority patent/JP2025004026A/en
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0012Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
    • A61K9/0048Eye, e.g. artificial tears
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/506Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/02Inorganic compounds
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/30Macromolecular organic or inorganic compounds, e.g. inorganic polyphosphates
    • A61K47/34Macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyesters, polyamino acids, polysiloxanes, polyphosphazines, copolymers of polyalkylene glycol or poloxamers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/30Macromolecular organic or inorganic compounds, e.g. inorganic polyphosphates
    • A61K47/36Polysaccharides; Derivatives thereof, e.g. gums, starch, alginate, dextrin, hyaluronic acid, chitosan, inulin, agar or pectin
    • A61K47/38Cellulose; Derivatives thereof
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/10Dispersions; Emulsions
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/10Ophthalmic agents for accommodation disorders, e.g. myopia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/12Ophthalmic agents for cataracts
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders

Definitions

  • Angiogenesis and neovascularization are the formation or growth of new or existing capillaries or blood vessels, which may have importance in disease and health.
  • Pathologic ocular angiogenesis or neovascularization can occur in retina, choroid, and cornea resulting in severe visual impairment. It is related to a broad spectrum of disorders including wet age-related macular degeneration (AMD) , diabetic retinopathy, retinal artery or vein occlusion, retinopathy of prematurity (ROP) , neovascular glaucoma, and corneal neovascularization secondary to infectious or inflammatory processes.
  • AMD wet age-related macular degeneration
  • ROP retinopathy of prematurity
  • neovascular glaucoma neovascular glaucoma
  • corneal neovascularization secondary to infectious or inflammatory processes.
  • composition comprising:
  • the dosage form is a suspension comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  • composition comprising:
  • composition is formulated as a suspension, gel, or ointment.
  • the particles are micronized.
  • the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m.
  • the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 10 ⁇ m.
  • the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.3 ⁇ m to about 5 ⁇ m.
  • At least about 10%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 20%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 30%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 40%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 50%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 60%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m.
  • At least about 70%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 80%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m In some embodiments, at least about 90%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 95%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have a D10 value of less than about 0.5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1.5 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have a D50 value of less than about 2.5 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have a D50 value of less than about 5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 7.5 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have a D90 value of less than about 5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 10 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 15 ⁇ m.
  • the compound of Formula (I) or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; is crystalline, microcrystalline, amorphous, or lyophilized.
  • the dosage form is a modified-release dosage form.
  • the modified-release dosage form is a delayed-release dosage form, an extended-release (ER) dosage form, or a targeted-release dosage form.
  • the ER dosage form is a sustained-release (SR) dosage form or controlled-release (CR) dosage form.
  • SR sustained-release
  • CR controlled-release
  • the composition comprises from about 0.025%to about 2.0%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.5%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.15%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  • the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a diluent, buffering agent, suspending agent, solubilizer, emulsifier, antioxidant, pH adjusting agent, preservative, detackifier, anti-foaming agent, chelating agent, thickening agent, viscomodulator, tonicifier, colorant, opacifier, binder, filler, plasticizer, or any combination thereof.
  • the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a suspending agent, a wetting agent, a pH adjuster, an anti-oxidant, an osmotic pressure regulator, or any combination thereof.
  • the suspending agent is a polymer.
  • the suspending agent is a carbomer homopolymer, carbomer copolymer, carbomer interpolymer, polycarbophil, a cellulose derivative, a polyvinyl alcohol, a povidone, a hyaluronic acid or a salt thereof, chondroitin sulfate, a natural gum, or any combination thereof.
  • the cellulose derivative is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, or any combination thereof.
  • the hydroxypropyl methylcellulose is K100, K4M, K15M, K100M, E4M, E10M, or any combination thereof.
  • the suspending agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) .
  • the hypromellose is HPMC E4M.
  • the concentration of the suspending agent in the compositions is up to about 1%w/w.
  • the concentration of the suspending agent in the formulation is up to about 0.5%w/w.
  • the solubilizer is ELP, HS 15, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the solubilizer is HS 15.
  • the concentration of the solubilizer in the composition is up to about 5%w/w.
  • the wetting agent is polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate.
  • the pH adjuster is a buffer.
  • the buffer is selected from borates, borate-polyol complexes, phosphate buffering agents, citrate buffering agents, acetate buffering agents, carbonate buffering agents, organic buffering agents, amino acid buffering agents, or combinations thereof.
  • the buffer is a phosphate buffer or a hydrate thereof.
  • the phosphate buffer is potassium phosphate or a hydrate thereof.
  • the phosphate buffer is sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate (NaH 2 PO 4 ⁇ 2H 2 O) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (Na 2 HPO 4 ⁇ 12H 2 O) , or a combination thereof.
  • the osmotic pressure regulator is a salt.
  • the salt is sodium chloride.
  • the concentration of the osmotic pressure regulator in the composition is up to about 0.5%w/w.
  • the anti-oxidant is a thiosulfate.
  • the thiosulfate is sodium thiosulfate.
  • the concentration of the anti-oxidant in the composition is up to about 0.2%w/w.
  • the composition is stable for up to 24 months at a temperature of from about 20 °C to about 25 °C.
  • the composition is substantially free of impurities.
  • the composition is at least about 90%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 95%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 96%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 97%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 98%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 99%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 99.1%, about 99.2%, about 99.3%, about 99.4%, about 99.5%, about 99.6%, about 99.7%, about 99.8%, about 99.9%, or about 100%by weight pure.
  • the composition comprises up to about 2%w/w of total impurities.
  • the composition comprises less than about 0.9%w/w, about 0.8%w/w, about 0.7%w/w, about 0.6%w/w, about 0.5%w/w, about 0.4%w/w, about 0.3%w/w, about 0.2%w/w, or about 0.1%w/w of total impurities.
  • the impurity is a degradant.
  • the impurity comprises the compound of Formula (II) :
  • the composition comprises up to about 2.0%w/w of any individual impurity.
  • the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
  • the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
  • the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension; and wherein the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
  • the ophthalmic disorder or disease affects function, clarity, and/or structure of the lens of the eye.
  • the ophthalmic disorder or disease is wet macular degeneration, cataracts, presbyopia, nuclear sclerosis of the eye lens, Refsum disease, Smith-Lemli-Opitz syndrome (SLOS) , Schnyder crystalline corneal dystrophy (SCCD) , abetalipoproteinemia, familial hypobetalipoproteinemia, neovascularization, or cancer.
  • the neovascularization is corneal neovascularization, iris neovascularization, or choroidal neovascularization.
  • the ophthalmic disorder or disease is corneal neovascularization.
  • the subject has undergone a surgical procedure for treatment of the ophthalmic disorder or disease.
  • about 0.005 mg/mLto about 5.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
  • about 0.01 mg/mL to about 4.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
  • the composition is administered the subject once per day, twice per day, three times per day, or four times per day.
  • the composition is administered the subject three times per day. In some embodiments, about 60 ⁇ L of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
  • the administration is topical or by ophthalmic injection.
  • the ophthalmic injection is an intravitreous or subconjunctival injection.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension, comprising:
  • a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration, comprising:
  • a suspension comprising particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is formed.
  • the sterilization is performed before the admixing. In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed after the admixing.
  • the sterilization is performed at a temperature of about 121 °C. In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed for a period of from about 20 to about 30 minutes.
  • FIG. 1. is a microscopic image of KDR2-2 API (100x magnification) , batch #CDK0120554-02-03P-01-32-01.
  • FIG. 2. is a microscopic image of KDR2-2 API after pulverization (400x magnification) , batch #CKo120554-02-03P-01-32-01.
  • FIG. 3. schematically depicts the manufacturing process for KDR2-2 Suspension EyeDrop, 0.1%w/v.
  • FIG. 4. is a graphic representation comparing the particle size distribution of KDR2-2 API before and after pulverization.
  • FIGS. 5A-5B are chromatograms showing the purity of KDR2-2 API before and after pulverization.
  • FIGS. 6A-6E are chromatograms depicting the increase in degradation of KDR2-2 formulation at 40 °C over a three month period.
  • FIG. 7. is a chromatogram depicting the purity of KDR2-2 formulation.
  • FIG. 8. Show the results of RBC cells hemolysis.
  • compositions for treating and/or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease are also provided herein.
  • methods of treating and/or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease are also provided herein.
  • tautomer refers to one of two or more structural isomers which exist in equilibrium and which are readily converted from one isomeric form to another.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds which differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms.
  • compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of a hydrogen by a deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by 13 C-or 14 C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention.
  • the compounds of the present invention may also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compounds.
  • the compounds may be radiolabeled with radioactive isotopes, such as for example tritium ( 3 H) , iodine-125 ( 125 I) , or carbon-14 ( 14 C) . All isotopic variations of the compounds of the present invention, whether radioactive or not, are encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
  • an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of one or more isotopes, including, but not limited to, hydrogen ( 1 H) , deuterium ( 2 H) , tritium ( 3 H) , carbon-11 ( 11 C) , carbon-12 ( 12 C) , carbon-13 ( 13 C) , carbon-14 ( 14 C) , nitrogen-13 ( 13 N) , nitrogen-14 ( 14 N) , nitrogen-15 ( 15 N) , oxygen-14 ( 14 O) , oxygen-15 ( 15 O) , oxygen-16 ( 16 O) , oxygen-17 ( 17 O) , oxygen-18 ( 18 O) , fluorine-17 ( 17 F) , fluorine-18 ( 18 F) , phosphorus-31 ( 31 P) , phosphorus-32 ( 32 P) , phosphorus-33 ( 33 P) , sulfur
  • an “isotopic variant” of a compound is in a stable form, that is, non-radioactive.
  • an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of one or more isotopes, including, but not limited to, hydrogen ( 1 H) , deuterium ( 2 H) , carbon-12 ( 12 C) , carbon-13 ( 13 C) , nitrogen-14 ( 14 N) , nitrogen-15 ( 15 N) , oxygen-16 ( 16 O) , oxygen-17 ( 17 O) , oxygen-18 ( 18 O) , fluorine-17 ( 17 F) , phosphorus-31 ( 31 P) , sulfur-32 ( 32 S) , sulfur-33 ( 33 S) , sulfur-34 ( 34 S) , sulfur-36 ( 36 S) , chlorine-35 ( 35 Cl) , chlorine-37 ( 37 Cl) , bromine-79 ( 79 Br) , bromine-81 ( 81 Br) , and iodine-127 ( 127 I) .
  • an “isotopic variant” of a compound is in an unstable form, that is, radioactive.
  • an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of one or more isotopes, including, but not limited to, tritium ( 3 H) , carbon-11 ( 11 C) , carbon-14 ( 14 C) , nitrogen-13 ( 13 N) , oxygen-14 ( 14 O) , oxygen-15 ( 15 O) , fluorine-18 ( 18 F) , phosphorus-32 ( 32 P) , phosphorus-33 ( 33 P) , sulfur-35 ( 35 S) , chlorine-36 ( 36 Cl) , iodine-123 ( 123 I) , iodine-125 ( 125 I) , iodine-129 ( 129 I) , and iodine-131 ( 131 I) .
  • any hydrogen can be 2 H, for example, or any carbon can be 13 C, for example, or any nitrogen can be 15 N, for example, or any oxygen can be 18 O, for example, where feasible according to the judgment of one of skill.
  • an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of deuterium (D) .
  • each amino acid position that contains more than one possible amino acid. It is specifically contemplated that each member of the Markush group should be considered separately, thereby comprising another embodiment, and the Markush group is not to be read as a single unit.
  • a or “an, ” as used in herein mean one or more.
  • substituted with a [n] , ” as used herein means the specified group may be substituted with one or more of any or all of the named substituents.
  • a group such as an alkyl or heteroaryl group
  • the group may contain one or more unsubstituted C 1 -C 20 alkyls, and/or one or more unsubstituted 2 to 20 membered heteroalkyls.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt includes both acid and base addition salts, i.e., including salts of the active compounds that are prepared with relatively nontoxic acids or bases, depending on the particular substituents found on the compounds described herein.
  • base addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired base, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts include sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, organic amino, or magnesium salt, or a similar salt.
  • acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived from relatively nontoxic organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, maleic, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, lactic, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, oxalic, methanesulfonic, and the like.
  • salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like (see, for example, Berge et al., “Pharmaceutical Salts, ” Journal of Pharmaceutical Science, 1977, 66, 1-19) .
  • Certain specific compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts, or to exist as Zwitterions.
  • the compounds of the present invention may exist as salts, such as with pharmaceutically acceptable acids.
  • the present invention includes such salts.
  • Non-limiting examples of such salts include hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, phosphates, sulfates, methanesulfonates, nitrates, maleates, acetates, citrates, fumarates, proprionates, tartrates (e.g., (+) -tartrates, (-) -tartrates, or mixtures thereof including racemic mixtures) , succinates, benzoates, and salts with amino acids such as glutamic acid, and quaternary ammonium salts (e.g., methyl iodide, ethyl iodide, and the like) .
  • These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • the neutral forms of the compounds are preferably regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner.
  • the parent form of the compound may differ from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents.
  • compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts.
  • the neutral forms of the compounds may be regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in a conventional manner.
  • the parent form of the compounds differs from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents, but, unless specifically indicated, the salts disclosed herein are equivalent to the parent form of the compound for the purposes of the present invention.
  • the present invention provides compounds, which are in a prodrug form.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds described herein are those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the present invention.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds described herein may be converted in vivo after administration.
  • prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the present invention by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment, such as, for example, when contacted with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present invention and are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” and “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refer to a substance that aids the administration of a compound to and absorption by a subject and can be included in the compositions of the present invention without causing a significant adverse toxicological effect on the patient.
  • Non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include water, NaCl, normal saline solutions, lactated Ringer’s, normal sucrose, normal glucose, binders, fillers, disintegrants, lubricants, coatings, sweeteners, flavors, salt solutions (such as Ringer’s solution) , alcohols, oils, gelatins, carbohydrates such as lactose, amylose or starch, fatty acid esters, hydroxymethycellulose, polyvinyl pyrrolidine, and colors, and the like.
  • Such preparations can be sterilized and, if desired, mixed with auxiliary agents such as lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure, buffers, coloring, and/or aromatic substances and the like that do not deleteriously react with the compounds of the invention.
  • auxiliary agents such as lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure, buffers, coloring, and/or aromatic substances and the like that do not deleteriously react with the compounds of the invention.
  • auxiliary agents such as lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure, buffers, coloring, and/or aromatic substances and the like that do not deleteriously react with the compounds of the invention.
  • auxiliary agents such as lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents
  • preparation is intended to include the formulation of the active compound with encapsulating material as a carrier providing a capsule in which the active component with or without other carriers, is surrounded by a carrier, which is thus in association with it.
  • carrier providing a capsule in which the active component with or without other carriers, is surrounded by a carrier, which is thus in association with it.
  • cachets and lozenges are included. Tablets, powders, capsules, pills, cachets, and lozenges can be used as solid dosage forms suitable for oral administration.
  • disease or “condition” refer to a state of being or health status of a patient or subject capable of being treated with the compounds or methods provided herein.
  • the disease may be an ophthalmic disease.
  • treating refers to any indicia of success in therapy or amelioration of an injury, disease, pathology or condition, including any objective or subjective parameter such as abatement; remission; diminishing of symptoms or making the injury, pathology or condition more tolerable to the patient; slowing in the rate of degeneration or decline; making the final point of degeneration less debilitating; improving a patient’s physical or mental well-being.
  • the treatment or amelioration of symptoms can be based on objective or subjective parameters; including the results of a physical examination, neuropsychiatric exams, and/or a psychiatric evaluation.
  • the term “treating” and conjugations thereof may include prevention of an injury, pathology, condition, or disease.
  • treating is preventing.
  • treating does not include preventing.
  • Treating, ” “treatment, ” “palliating, ” or “ameliorating” are used interchangeably herein. These terms as used herein (and as well-understood in the art) also broadly include any approach for obtaining beneficial or desired results in a subject’s condition, including clinical results.
  • Beneficial or desired clinical results can include, but are not limited to, alleviation or amelioration of one or more symptoms or conditions, diminishment of the extent of a disease, stabilizing (i.e., not worsening) the state of disease, prevention of a disease’s transmission or spread, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state, diminishment of the reoccurrence of disease, and remission, whether partial or total and whether detectable or undetectable.
  • treatment, ” as used herein includes any cure, amelioration, or prevention of a disease.
  • Treatment may prevent the disease from occurring; inhibit the disease’s spread; relieve the disease’s symptoms (e.g., itching, swelling, burning, cough, fever, chest pain, difficulty breathing) , fully or partially remove the disease’s underlying cause, shorten a disease’s duration, or do a combination of these things.
  • relieve the disease’s symptoms e.g., itching, swelling, burning, cough, fever, chest pain, difficulty breathing
  • fully or partially remove the disease’s underlying cause e.g., itching, swelling, burning, cough, fever, chest pain, difficulty breathing
  • Treating” and “treatment” as used herein include prophylactic treatment.
  • Treatment methods include administering to a subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein.
  • the administering step may consist of a single administration or may include a series of administrations.
  • the length of the treatment period depends on a variety of factors, such as the severity of the condition, the age of the patient, the concentration of the compound, the activity of the compositions used in the treatment, or a combination thereof.
  • the effective dosage of an agent used for the treatment or prophylaxis may increase or decrease over the course of a particular treatment or prophylaxis regime. Changes in dosage may result and become apparent by standard diagnostic assays known in the art. In some instances, chronic administration may be required.
  • the compositions are administered to the subject in an amount and duration sufficient to treat the patient.
  • prevent refers to a decrease in the occurrence of disease symptoms in a patient.
  • the preventing or prevention may be complete (no detectable symptoms) or partial, such that fewer symptoms are observed than would likely occur absent treatment.
  • prevent refers to slowing the progression of the disease, disorder or condition or inhibiting progression thereof to a harmful or otherwise undesired state.
  • patient or “subject in need thereof” refer to a living organism suffering from or prone to a disease or condition that can be treated by administration of a pharmaceutical composition as provided herein.
  • Non-limiting examples include humans, other mammals, bovines, rats, mice, dogs, monkeys, goat, sheep, cows, deer, and other non-mammalian animals including, but not limited to, fish and birds.
  • a patient is human.
  • Treatment also refers to the systemic delivery of the compounds disclosed herein to any type of plant, including trees, shrubs, flowering plants, foliage plants, house plants, groundcover and grass, and agronomic plants (including crops of agronomic plants) .
  • hydrates are compounds that contain either stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amounts of water, and, in some embodiments, are formed during the process of crystallization with water.
  • agronomic plant refers to a plant of which a part or all is, or has been, harvested or cultivated on a commercial scale, or serves as an important source of feed, food, fiber, or other chemical compounds.
  • an “effective amount” is an amount sufficient for a compound to accomplish a stated purpose relative to the absence of the compound (e.g., achieve the effect for which it is administered, treat a disease, reduce enzyme activity, increase enzyme activity, reduce a signaling pathway, or reduce one or more symptoms of a disease or condition) .
  • An example of an “effective amount” is an amount sufficient to contribute to the treatment, prevention, or reduction of a symptom or symptoms of a disease, which could also be referred to as a “therapeutically effective amount. ”
  • a “reduction” of a symptom or symptoms means decreasing of the severity or frequency of the symptom (s) , or elimination of the symptom (s) .
  • a “prophylactically effective amount” of a drug is an amount of a drug that, when administered to a subject, will have the intended prophylactic effect, e.g., preventing or delaying the onset (or reoccurrence) of an injury, disease, pathology or condition, or reducing the likelihood of the onset (or reoccurrence) of an injury, disease, pathology, or condition, or their symptoms.
  • the full prophylactic effect does not necessarily occur by administration of one dose, and may occur only after administration of a series of doses. Thus, a prophylactically effective amount may be administered in one or more administrations.
  • An “activity decreasing amount, ” as used herein, refers to an amount of antagonist required to decrease the activity of an enzyme relative to the absence of the antagonist.
  • a “function disrupting amount, ” as used herein, refers to the amount of antagonist required to disrupt the function of an enzyme or protein relative to the absence of the antagonist. The exact amounts will depend on the purpose of the treatment, and will be ascertainable by one skilled in the art using known techniques (see, e.g., Lieberman, Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms (vols. 1-3, 1992) ; Lloyd, The Art, Science and Technology of Pharmaceutical Compounding (1999) ; Pickar, Dosage Calculations (1999) ; and Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, 2003, Gennaro, Ed., Lippincott, Williams &Wilkins) .
  • the therapeutically effective amount can be ascertained by measuring relevant physiological effects, and it can be adjusted in connection with the dosing regimen and diagnostic analysis of the subject’s condition, and the like.
  • measurement of the serum level of a compound of Formula (I) or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof (or, e.g., a metabolite thereof) at a particular time post-administration may be indicative of whether a therapeutically effective amount has been administered.
  • therapeutically effective amount can be initially determined from cell culture assays.
  • Target concentrations will be those concentrations of active compound (s) that are capable of achieving the methods described herein, as measured using the methods described herein or known in the art.
  • therapeutically effective amounts for use in humans can also be determined from animal models.
  • a dose for humans can be formulated to achieve a concentration that has been found to be effective in animals.
  • the dosage in humans can be adjusted by monitoring compounds effectiveness and adjusting the dosage upwards or downwards, as described above. Adjusting the dose to achieve maximal efficacy in humans based on the methods described above and other methods is well within the capabilities of the ordinarily skilled artisan. Adjusting the dose to achieve maximal therapeutic window efficacy or toxicity in humans based on the methods described above and other methods is well within the capabilities of the ordinarily skilled artisan.
  • a therapeutically effective amount refers to that amount of therapeutic agent sufficient to ameliorate the disorder, as described above.
  • a therapeutically effective amount will show an increase or decrease of at least 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 75%, 80%, 90%, or at least 100%.
  • Therapeutic efficacy can also be expressed as “-fold” increase or decrease.
  • a therapeutically effective amount can have at least a 1.2-fold, 1.5-fold, 2-fold, 5-fold, or more effect over a control.
  • Dosages may be varied depending upon the requirements of the patient and the compound being employed.
  • the dose administered to a patient, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to effect a beneficial therapeutic response in the patient over time.
  • the size of the dose also will be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects. Determination of the proper dosage for a particular situation is within the skill of the practitioner. Generally, treatment is initiated with smaller dosages which are less than the optimum dose of the compound. Thereafter, the dosage is increased by small increments until the optimum effect under circumstances is reached. Dosage amounts and intervals can be adjusted individually to provide levels of the administered compound effective for the particular clinical indication being treated. This will provide a therapeutic regimen that is commensurate with the severity of the individual’s disease state.
  • administering means parenteral or enteral administration. Accordingly, as used herein, “administering” refers to administration including, but not limited to, oral administration, administration as a suppository, topical contact, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, inhalation, nebulization, intralesional, intrathecal, intracranial, intranasal, subcutaneous administration, or the implantation of a slow-release device, e.g., a mini-osmotic pump, to a subject. Administration is by any route, including transmucosal (e.g., buccal, sublingual, palatal, gingival, nasal, vaginal, rectal, or transdermal) .
  • transmucosal e.g., buccal, sublingual, palatal, gingival, nasal, vaginal, rectal, or transdermal
  • Parenteral administration includes, e.g., intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arteriole, intradermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intraventricular, and intracranial.
  • Other modes of delivery include, but are not limited to, the use of liposomal formulations, intravenous infusion, transdermal patches, by ocular route, by otic route, etc.
  • co-administer it is meant that a composition described herein is administered at the same time, just prior to, or just after the administration of one or more additional therapies.
  • the compound of the invention can be administered alone or can be co-administered to the patient.
  • Co-administration is meant to include simultaneous, approximately simultaneous, or sequential administration of the compound individually or in combination (more than one compound or agent) .
  • compositions of the present invention can be delivered by transdermally, by a topical route, formulated as applicator sticks, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, gels, creams, ointments, pastes, jellies, paints, powders, and aerosols.
  • Oral preparations include tablets, pills, powder, dragees, capsules, liquids, lozenges, cachets, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, etc., suitable for ingestion by the patient.
  • Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, pills, capsules, cachets, suppositories, and dispersible granules.
  • Liquid form preparations include solutions, suspensions, and emulsions, for example, water or water/propylene glycol solutions.
  • the compositions of the present invention may additionally include components to provide sustained release and/or comfort. Such components include high molecular weight, anionic mucomimetic polymers, gelling polysaccharides and finely-divided drug carrier substrates. These components are discussed in greater detail in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,911,920; 5,403,841; 5,212,162; and 4,861,760. The entire contents of these patents are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety for all purposes.
  • compositions of the present invention can also be delivered as microspheres for slow release in the body.
  • microspheres can be administered via intradermal injection of drug-containing microspheres, which slowly release subcutaneously (see Rao, J. Biomater Sci. Polym. Ed. 7: 623-645, 1995; as biodegradable and injectable formulations (see, e.g., Gao Pharm. Res. 12: 857-863, 1995) ; or, as microspheres for oral administration (see, e.g., Eyles, J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 49: 669-674, 1997) .
  • the formulations of the compositions of the present invention can be delivered by the use of liposomes which fuse with the cellular membrane or are endocytosed, i.e., by employing receptor ligands attached to the liposome, that bind to surface membrane protein receptors of the cell resulting in endocytosis.
  • liposomes particularly where the liposome surface carries receptor ligands specific for target cells, or are otherwise preferentially directed to a specific organ, one can focus the delivery of the compositions of the present invention into the target cells in vivo. (See, e.g., Al-Muhammed, J. Microencapsul. 13: 293-306, 1996; Chonn, Curr. Opin. Biotechnol. 6: 698-708, 1995; Ostro, Am. J. Hosp. Pharm. 46: 1576-1587, 1989) .
  • the compositions of the present invention can also be delivered as nanoparticles.
  • compositions described herein are administered at the same time, just prior to, or just after the administration of one or more additional therapies.
  • the compounds of the invention can be administered alone or can be co-administered to the patient.
  • Co-administration is meant to include simultaneous or sequential administration of the compounds individually or in combination (more than one compound) .
  • the compositions of the present invention can be delivered transdermally, by a topical route, or formulated as applicator sticks, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, gels, creams, ointments, pastes, jellies, paints, powders, and aerosols.
  • therapeutically effective amount can be initially determined from cell culture assays.
  • Target concentrations will be those concentrations of active compound (s) that are capable of achieving the methods described herein, as measured using the methods described herein or known in the art.
  • therapeutically effective amounts for use in humans can also be determined from animal models.
  • a dose for humans can be formulated to achieve a concentration that has been found to be effective in animals.
  • the dosage in humans can be adjusted by monitoring compounds effectiveness and adjusting the dosage upwards or downwards, as described above. Adjusting the dose to achieve maximal efficacy in humans based on the methods described above and other methods is well within the capabilities of the ordinarily skilled artisan.
  • Dosages may be varied depending upon the requirements of the patient and the compound being employed.
  • the dose administered to a patient, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to affect a beneficial therapeutic response in the patient over time.
  • the size of the dose also will be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects. Determination of the proper dosage for a particular situation is within the skill of the practitioner. Generally, treatment is initiated with smaller dosages which are less than the optimum dose of the compound. Thereafter, the dosage is increased by small increments until the optimum effect under circumstances is reached.
  • Dosage amounts and intervals can be adjusted individually to provide levels of the administered compound effective for the particular clinical indication being treated. This will provide a therapeutic regimen that is commensurate with the severity of the individual's disease state.
  • an effective prophylactic or therapeutic treatment regimen can be planned that does not cause substantial toxicity and yet is effective to treat the clinical symptoms demonstrated by the particular patient.
  • This planning should involve the careful choice of active compound by considering factors such as compound potency, relative bioavailability, patient body weight, presence and severity of adverse side effects, preferred mode of administration and the toxicity profile of the selected agent.
  • co-administration includes administering one active agent within 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24 hours, 2 days, 4 days, 1 week or 1 month of a second active agent.
  • Co-administration includes administering two active agents simultaneously, approximately simultaneously (e.g., within about 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 minutes of each other) , or sequentially in any order.
  • co-administration can be accomplished by co-formulation, i.e., preparing a single pharmaceutical composition including both active agents.
  • the active agents can be formulated separately.
  • the active and/or adjunctive agents may be linked or conjugated to one another.
  • a cell can be identified by well-known methods in the art including, for example, presence of an intact membrane, staining by a particular dye, ability to produce progeny or, in the case of a gamete, ability to combine with a second gamete to produce a viable offspring.
  • Cells may include prokaryotic and eukaroytic cells.
  • Prokaryotic cells include but are not limited to bacteria.
  • Eukaryotic cells include but are not limited to yeast cells and cells derived from plants and animals, for example mammalian, insect (e.g., spodoptera) and human cells. Cells may be useful when they are naturally nonadherent or have been treated not to adhere to surfaces, for example by trypsinization.
  • Control or “control experiment” is used in accordance with its plain ordinary meaning and refers to an experiment in which the subjects or reagents of the experiment are treated as in a parallel experiment except for omission of a procedure, reagent, or variable of the experiment. In some instances, the control is used as a standard of comparison in evaluating experimental effects. In some embodiments, a control is the measurement of the activity of a proteinin the absence of a compound as described herein (including embodiments and examples) .
  • in a sufficient amount to effect a change means that there is a detectable difference between a level of an indicator measured before (e.g., a baseline level) and after administration of a particular therapy.
  • Indicators include any objective parameter (e.g., serum concentration) or subjective parameter (e.g., a subject’s feeling of well-being) .
  • substantially pure indicates that a component makes up greater than about 75%of the total content of the composition excluding excipients, and typically greater than about 85%of the total content. More typically, “substantially pure” refers to compositions in which at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%or more of the total composition excluding excipients is the component of interest. In some cases, the component of interest will make up greater than about 90%, greater than about 95%, or greater than about 96%of the total content of the composition excluding excipients (percentage in a weight per weight basis) .
  • “Substantially pure” indicates that the composition contains less than, up to, or no more than about 25%, 15%, 10%, 5%, or 4%of known or unknown impurities. Impurities do not include excipients (e.g., binders, fillers, diluents, glidants, lubricants, disintegrants, etc. )
  • Neovascularization refers to the formation of new blood vessels, usually in the form of functional microvascular networks, capable of perfusion by red blood cells, which serve as collateral circulation in response to local poor perfusion or ischemia. Neovascularization is conventionally distinguished from angiogenesis in that angiogenesis is mainly characterized by the protrusion and outgrowth of capillary buds and sprouts from pre-existing blood vessels.
  • cornea angiogenesis and “corneal neovascularization” refer to the process of formation of new vessels originate and the corneal vessels extending from the limbus to the adjacent corneal stroma. Because the cornea is avascular, which does not contain any blood vessels, any new blood vessels in the cornea typically arise from the growth of blood vessels from the limbal vascular plexus area of the eye into the cornea.
  • Chosenoidal neovascularization refers to the formation of new vessels originating in the choroid, and can access the subretinal space through rupture of Bruch's membrane in the retinal pigment epithelium.
  • Retinal neovascularization refers to the formation of new vessels originate Retinal vessel and extending into the vitreous from the retinal surface.
  • Iris neovascularization is a medical condition of the iris of the eye in which new abnormal blood vessels (formed by neovascularization) are found on the surface of the iris. This condition is often associated with diabetes in advanced proliferative diabetic retinopathy. Other conditions causing rubeosis iridis include central retinal vein occlusion, ocular ischemic syndrome, and chronic retinal detachment.
  • Macular degeneration also referred to as retinal degeneration, is a disease of the eye that involves deterioration of the macula, the central portion of the retina. Unless specified, the “macular degeneration” of the present disclosure includes all forms of the disease.
  • “Wet macular degeneration” also known as the neovascular or exudative form of macular degeneration in which new blood vessels form (i.e., neovascularization) to improve the blood supply to retinal tissue, specifically beneath the macula, a portion of the retina that is responsible for our sharp central vision. The new vessels are easily damaged and sometimes rupture, causing bleeding and injury to the surrounding tissue.
  • Wet macular degeneration accounts for approximately 90%of macular degeneration-related blindness. Neovascularization can lead to rapid loss of vision and eventual scarring of the retinal tissues and bleeding in the eye. This scar tissue and blood produces a dark, distorted area in the vision, often rendering the eye legally blind.
  • Wet macular degeneration usually starts with distortion in the central field of vision. Straight lines become wavy. Subjects with wet macular degeneration also report having blurred vision and blank spots (scotoma) in their visual field.
  • Disposing agents, ” and/or “viscosity modulating agents” include materials that control the diffusion and homogeneity of a drug through liquid media or a granulation method or blend method. In some embodiments, these agents also facilitate the effectiveness of a coating or eroding matrix.
  • Exemplary diffusion facilitators/dispersing agents include, e.g., hydrophilic polymers, electrolytes, 60 or 80, PEG, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP; commercially known as ) , and the carbohydrate-based dispersing agents such as, for example, hydroxypropyl celluloses (e.g., HPC, HPC-SL, and HPC-L) , hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses (e.g., HPMC K100, HPMC K4M, HPMC K15M, and HPMC K100M) , carboxymethylcellulose sodium, methylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate (HPMCAS) , noncrystalline cellulose, magnesium aluminum silicate, triethanolamine, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) , vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer (S630) , 4- (1, 1,
  • polyvinylpyrrolidone K12 polyvinylpyrrolidone K17, polyvinylpyrrolidone K25, or polyvinylpyrrolidone K30, polyvinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer (S-630)
  • polyethylene glycol e.g., the polyethylene glycol can have a molecular weight of about 300 to about 6000, or about 3350 to about 4000, or about 7000 to about 5400, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, polysorbate-80, sodium alginate, gums, such as, e.g., gum tragacanth and gum acacia, guar gum, xanthans, including xanthan gum, sugars, cellulosics, such as, e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polysorbate-80, sodium alginate, polyethoxylated sorbitan monolau
  • Plasticizcers such as cellulose or triethyl cellulose can also be used as dispersing agents.
  • Dispersing agents particularly useful in liposomal dispersions and self-emulsifying dispersions are dimyristoyl phosphatidyl choline, natural phosphatidyl choline from eggs, natural phosphatidyl glycerol from eggs, cholesterol and isopropyl myristate.
  • diluent refers to chemical compounds that are used to dilute the compound of interest prior to delivery. Diluents can also be used to stabilize compounds because they can provide a more stable environment. Salts dissolved in buffered solutions (which also can provide pH control or maintenance) are utilized as diluents in the art, including, but not limited to a phosphate buffered saline solution. In certain embodiments, diluents increase bulk of the composition to facilitate compression or create sufficient bulk for homogenous blend for capsule filling.
  • Such compounds include e.g., lactose, starch, mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, microcrystalline cellulose such as dibasic calcium phosphate, dicalcium phosphate dihydrate; tricalcium phosphate, calcium phosphate; anhydrous lactose, spray-dried lactose; pregelatinized starch, compressible sugar, such as (Amstar) ; mannitol, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate, sucrose-based diluents, confectioner's sugar; monobasic calcium sulfate monohydrate, calcium sulfate dihydrate; calcium lactate trihydrate, dextrates; hydrolyzed cereal solids, amylose; powdered cellulose, calcium carbonate; glycine, kaolin; mannitol, sodium chloride; inositol, bentonite, and the like.
  • compressible sugar such as (Amstar)
  • non water-soluble diluent represents compounds typically used in the formulation of pharmaceuticals, such as calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, starches, modified starches and microcrystalline cellulose, and microcellulose (e.g., having a density of about 0.45 g/cm3, e.g., Avicel, powdered cellulose) , and talc.
  • Solubilizers include compounds such as triacetin, triethylcitrate, ethyl oleate, ethyl caprylate, sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium doccusate, vitamin E TPGS, dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, N-hydroxyethylpyrrolidone, polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cyclodextrins, ethanol, n-butanol, isopropyl alcohol, cholesterol, bile salts, polyethylene glycol 200-600, glycofurol, transcutol, propylene glycol, and dimethyl isosorbide and the like.
  • Stabilizers include compounds such as any antioxidation agents, buffers, acids, preservatives and the like.
  • “Suspending agents” include compounds such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone K12, polyvinylpyrrolidone K17, polyvinylpyrrolidone K25, or polyvinylpyrrolidone K30, vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer (S630) , polyethylene glycol, e.g., the polyethylene glycol can have a molecular weight of about 300 to about 6000, or about 3350 to about 4000, or about 7000 to about 5400, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose acetate stearate, polysorbate-80, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium alginate, gums, such as, e.g., gum tragacanth and gum acacia, guar gum, xanthans, including xanthan gum, sugars, cellulosics, such as,
  • “Surfactants” include compounds such as sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium docusate, Tween 60 or 80, triacetin, vitamin E TPGS, sorbitan monooleate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polysorbates, polaxomers, bile salts, glyceryl monostearate, copolymers of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide, e.g., (BASF) , and the like.
  • surfactants include polyoxyethylene fatty acid glycerides and vegetable oils, e.g., polyoxyethylene (60) hydrogenated castor oil; and polyoxyethylene alkylethers and alkylphenyl ethers, e.g., octoxynol 10, octoxynol 40.
  • surfactants may be included to enhance physical stability or for other purposes.
  • Many nonionic surfactants are known that are acceptable for topical ophthalmic formulations.
  • Such surfactants include: tyloxapol; polyoxyethylene sorbitan esters, such as polysorbate 80, polysorbate 60, and polysorbate 20; polyethoxylated castor oils, such as Cremophore EL; polyethoxylated hydrogenated castor oils, such as HCO-40; and poloxamers.
  • carrier refers to relatively nontoxic chemical compounds or agents that facilitate the incorporation of a compound into cells or tissues.
  • Carrier materials include any commonly used excipients in pharmaceutics and should be selected on the basis of compatibility with compounds disclosed herein, and the release profile properties of the desired dosage form.
  • Exemplary carrier materials include, e.g., binders, suspending agents, disintegration agents, filling agents, surfactants, solubilizers, stabilizers, lubricants, wetting agents, diluents, and the like.
  • “Pharmaceutically compatible carrier materials” may include, but are not limited to, acacia, gelatin, colloidal silicon dioxide, calcium glycerophosphate, calcium lactate, maltodextrin, glycerine, magnesium silicate, polyvinylpyrrollidone (PVP) , cholesterol, cholesterol esters, sodium caseinate, soy lecithin, taurocholic acid, phosphotidylcholine, sodium chloride, tricalcium phosphate, dipotassium phosphate, cellulose and cellulose conjugates, sugars sodium stearoyl lactylate, carrageenan, monoglyceride, diglyceride, pregelatinized starch, and the like.
  • PVP polyvinylpyrrollidone
  • Weight agents include compounds such as oleic acid, glyceryl monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate, sodium docusate, sodium oleate, sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium doccusate, triacetin, Tween 80, vitamin E TPGS, ammonium salts and the like.
  • compositions of the present invention are formulated to be isotonic, relative to the natural tear fluids.
  • the compositions are therefore formulated to have an osmolality of about 280 to 320 milliosmoles per kilogram water ( "mOsm/kg” ) .
  • the compositions may contain ophthalmically acceptable tonicity-adjusting agents, such as sodium chloride, potassium chloride, glycerin, sorbitol or mannitol.
  • the ophthalmic composition further comprises a tonicity adjusting agent.
  • the tonicity adjusting agent is selected from sodium chloride, sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, sodium bisulfate, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, zinc chloride, potassium acetate, sodium acetate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium thiosulfate, magnesium sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, dextrose, mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, sucrose, urea, propylene glycol, glycerin, or a combination thereof.
  • the composition is stored in a plastic container.
  • the material of the plastic container comprises low-density polyethylene (LDPE) .
  • the composition further comprises a pH adjusting agent.
  • the ophthalmically acceptable carrier further comprises at least one viscosity-enhancing agent.
  • the viscosity-enhancing agent is selected from cellulose-based polymers, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene triblock copolymers, dextran-based polymers, polyvinyl alcohol, dextrin, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyalkylene glycols, chitosan, collagen, gelatin, hyaluronic acid, or combinations thereof.
  • composition comprising:
  • the dosage form is a suspension comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  • composition comprising:
  • composition is formulated as a suspension, a gel, or an ointment.
  • pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension.
  • the particles are micronized.
  • the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 10 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.3 ⁇ m to about 5 ⁇ m.
  • At least about 10%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 20%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 30%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 40%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 50%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 60%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m.
  • At least about 70%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 80%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m In some embodiments, at least about 90%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, at least about 95%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 40 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have a D10 value of less than about 0.5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1.5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 0.5, about 0.6, about 0.7, about 0.8, about 0.9, about 1.0, about 1.1, about 1.2, about 1.3, about1.4, or about 1.5 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have a D50 value of less than about 2.5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 7.5 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have a D50 value of less than about 2.5, about 2.6, about 2.7, about 2.8, about 2.9, about 3.0, about 3.1, about 3.2, about 3.3, about 3.4, about 3.5, about 3.6, about 3.7, about 3.8, about 3.9, about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4.8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1, about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, about 6.0, about 6.1, about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, about 6.5, about 6.6, about 6.7, about 6.8, about 6.9, about 7.0, about 7.1, about 7.2, about 7.3, about 7.4, or about 7.5 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have a D90 value of less than about 5 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 10 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 15 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4.8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1, about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0 ⁇ m. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 5, about 6, about 7, about 8, about 9, about 10, about 11, about 12, about 13, about 14, or about 15 ⁇ m.
  • the compound of Formula (I) or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; is crystalline, microcrystalline, amorphous, or lyophilized.
  • the dosage form is a modified-release dosage form.
  • the modified-release dosage form is a delayed-release dosage form, an extended-release (ER) dosage form, or a targeted-release dosage form.
  • the ER dosage form is a sustained-release (SR) dosage form or controlled-release (CR) dosage form.
  • the composition comprises from about 0.025%to about 2.0%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  • the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.5%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.15%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  • the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a diluent, buffering agent, suspending agent, solubilizer, emulsifier, antioxidant, pH adjusting agent, preservative, detackifier, anti-foaming agent, chelating agent, thickening agent, viscomodulator, tonicifier, colorant, opacifier, binder, filler, plasticizer, or any combination thereof.
  • the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a suspending agent, a wetting agent, a pH adjuster, an anti-oxidant, an osmotic pressure regulator, or any combination thereof.
  • the suspending agent is a polymer.
  • the suspending agent is a carbomer homopolymer, carbomer copolymer, carbomer interpolymer, polycarbophil, a cellulose derivative, a polyvinyl alcohol, a povidone, a hyaluronic acid or a salt thereof, chondroitin sulfate, a natural gum, or any combination thereof.
  • the cellulose derivative is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, or any combination thereof.
  • the hydroxypropyl methylcellulose is K100, K4M, K15M, K100M, E4M, E10M, or any combination thereof.
  • the suspending agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) .
  • the hypromellose is HPMC E4M.
  • the concentration of the suspending agent in the compositions is up to about 1%w/w. In some embodiments, the concentration of the suspending agent in the formulation is up to about 0.5%w/w.
  • the solubilizer is ELP, HS 15, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the solubilizer is HS 15.
  • the concentration of the solubilizer in the composition is up to about 5%w/w.
  • the wetting agent is polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate.
  • the pH adjuster is a buffer.
  • the buffer is a phosphate buffer or a hydrate thereof.
  • the phosphate buffer is potassium phosphate or a hydrate thereof.
  • the phosphate buffer is sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate (NaH 2 PO 4 ⁇ 2H 2 O) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (Na 2 HPO 4 ⁇ 12H 2 O) , or a combination thereof.
  • the osmotic pressure regulator is a salt.
  • the salt is sodium chloride.
  • the concentration of the osmotic pressure regulator in the composition is up to about 0.5%w/w.
  • the anti-oxidant is a thiosulfate. In some embodiments, the thiosulfate is sodium thiosulfate.
  • the concentration of the anti-oxidant in the composition is up to about 0.2%w/w.
  • the composition is stable for up to 24 months at a temperature of from about 20 °C to about 25 °C.
  • the composition is substantially free of impurities.
  • the composition is at least about 90%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 95%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 96%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 97%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 98%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 99%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 99.1%, about 99.2%, about 99.3%, about 99.4%, about 99.5%, about 99.6%, about 99.7%, about 99.8%, about 99.9%, or about 100%pure.
  • the composition comprises up to about 2%w/w of total impurities. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than about 0.9%w/w, about 0.8%w/w, about 0.7%w/w, about 0.6%w/w, about 0.5%w/w, about 0.4%w/w, about 0.3%w/w, about 0.2%w/w, or about 0.1%w/w of total impurities.
  • the impurity is a degradant.
  • the impurity comprises the compound of Formula (II) :
  • the composition comprises up to about 2.0%w/w of any individual impurity.
  • the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
  • Antimicrobial agents such as antibiotics or anti-fungal agents may be added. Other substances can be added to the compositions to stabilize and/or preserve the compositions.
  • the material can be packaged and stored, for example, at room temperature, or for example, at -20 °C or -80 °C prior to use.
  • formulations that do not have a dose-to-dose variation.
  • the temperature of the storage condition is between about 20 °Cand about 70 °C. In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is between about 25 °C and about 65 °C, about 30 °C and about 60 °C, about 35 °C and about 55 °C, or about about 40 °C and about 50 °C. In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is about 25 °C. In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is about 40 °C. In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is about 60 °C.
  • the relative humidity of the storage condition is between about 50%and about 80%, or between about 60%and about 75%. In some embodiments, the relative humidity of the storage condition is about 60%. In some embodiments, the relative humidity of the storage condition is about 75%.
  • the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
  • the composition has a pH of less than about 9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.1.
  • the composition has a pH of less than about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.1.
  • the composition has a pH of less than about 7.0. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 2.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 1.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 1.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition.
  • the composition comprises less than 0.4%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.3%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.2%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.1%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition.
  • the composition described herein comprises a buffer.
  • a buffer is selected from borates, borate-polyol complexes, phosphate buffering agents, citrate buffering agents, acetate buffering agents, carbonate buffering agents, organic buffering agents, amino acid buffering agents, or combinations thereof.
  • borates include boric acid, salts of boric acid, other pharmaceutically acceptable borates, and combinations thereof.
  • borates include boric acid, sodium borate, potassium borate, calcium borate, magnesium borate, manganese borate, and other such borate salts.
  • polyol includes any compound having at least one hydroxyl group on each of two adjacent carbon atoms that are not in trans configuration relative to each other.
  • the polyols can be linear or cyclic, substituted or unsubstituted, or mixtures thereof, so long as the resultant complex is water soluble and pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • examples of polyol include: sugars, sugar alcohols, sugar acids and uronic acids.
  • polyols include, but are not limited to: mannitol, glycerin, xylitol and sorbitol.
  • phosphate buffering agents include phosphoric acid; alkali metal phosphates such as disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, trisodium phosphate, dipotassium hydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, and tripotassium phosphate; alkaline earth metal phosphates such as calcium phosphate, calcium hydrogen phosphate, calcium dihydrogen phosphate, monomagnesium phosphate, dimagnesium phosphate (magnesium hydrogen phosphate) , and trimagnesium phosphate; ammonium phosphates such as diammonium hydrogen phosphate and ammonium dihydrogen phosphate; or a combination thereof.
  • the phosphate buffering agent is an anhydride.
  • the phosphate buffering agent is a hydrate.
  • borate-polyol complexes include those described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,503,497. In some instances, the borate-polyol complexes comprise borates in an amount of from about 0.01 to about 2.0%w/v, and one or more polyols in an amount of from about 0.01%to about 5.0%w/v.
  • citrate buffering agents include citric acid and sodium citrate.
  • acetate buffering agents include acetic acid, potassium acetate, and sodium acetate.
  • carbonate buffering agents include sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate.
  • organic buffering agents include Good’s Buffer, such as for example 2- (N-morpholino) ethanesulfonic acid (MES) , N- (2-Acetamido) iminodiacetic acid, N- (Carbamoylmethyl) iminodiacetic acid (ADA) , piperazine-N, N’-bis (2-ethanesulfonic acid (PIPES) , N- (2-acetamido) -2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES) , ⁇ -Hydroxy-4-morpholinepropanesulfonic acid, 3-Morpholino-2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid (MOPSO) , cholamine chloride, 3- (N-morpholino) propansulfonic acid (MOPS) , N, N-bis (2-hydroxyethyl) -2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES) , 2- [ (2-Hydroxy-1, 1-bis (
  • amino acid buffering agents include taurine, aspartic acid and its salts (e.g., potassium salts, etc) , E-aminocaproic acid, and the like.
  • compositions described herein further comprise a tonicity adjusting agent.
  • Tonicity adjusting agent is an agent introduced into a preparation such as an ophthalmic composition to reduce local irritation by preventing osmotic shock at the site of application.
  • buffer solution and/or a pH adjusting agent that broadly maintains the ophthalmic solution at a particular ion concentration and pH are considered as tonicity adjusting agents.
  • tonicity adjusting agents include various salts, such as halide salts of a monovalent cation.
  • tonicity adjusting agents include mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, sucrose, urea, and glycerin.
  • suitable tonicity adjustors comprise sodium chloride, sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, sodium bisulfate, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, zinc chloride, potassium acetate, sodium acetate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium thiosulfate, magnesium sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, dextrose, mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, sucrose, urea, propylene glycol, glycerin, or a combination thereof.
  • the concentration of the tonicity adjusting agent in a composition described herein is between about 0.5%and about 2.0%. In some instances, the concentration of the tonicity adjusting agent in a composition described herein is between about 0.7%and about 1.8%, about 0.8%and about 1.5%, or about 1%and about 1.3%. In some instances, the concentration of the tonicity adjusting agent is about 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, or 1.9%. In some cases, the percentage is a weight percentage.
  • the composition described herein further comprises a pH adjusting agent.
  • the pH adjusting agent is used which can be acid or base.
  • the base can be oxides, hydroxides, carbonates, bicarbonates and the likes.
  • the oxides can be metal oxides such as calcium oxide, magnesium oxide and the likes; hydroxides can be of alkali metals and alkaline earth metals such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide and the likes and carbonates can be sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonates, potassium bicarbonates and the likes.
  • the acid can be mineral acid and organic acids such as hydrochloric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, acetic acid, citric acid, fumaric acid, malic acid tartaric acid and the likes.
  • the pH adjusting agent includes, but is not limited to, acetate, bicarbonate, ammonium chloride, citrate, phosphate, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof and combinations or mixtures thereof.
  • the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
  • the composition has a pH of more than about 5.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.1.
  • the composition has a pH of more than about 6.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.1.
  • the composition has a pH of more than about 7.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.1.
  • the composition has a pH of less than about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.1.
  • the composition has a pH of less than about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.1. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.0.
  • the composition described herein further comprises a disinfecting agent.
  • disinfecting agents include polymeric biguanides, polymeric quarternary ammonium compounds, chlorites, bisbiguanides, chlorite compounds (e.g., potassium chlorite, sodium chlorite, calcium chlorite, magnesium chlorite, or mixtures thereof) , and a combination thereof.
  • the composition described herein further comprises a preservative.
  • a perservative is added at a concentration to a composition described herein to prevent the growth of or to destroy a microorganism introduced into the composition.
  • microorganisms refer to bacteria (e.g., Proteus mirabilis, Serratia marcesens) , virus (e.g., Herpes simplex virus, herpes zoster virus) , fungus (e.g. fungi from the genus Fusarium) , yeast (e.g., Candida albicans) , parasites (e.g., Plasmodium spp., Gnathostoma spp.
  • bacteria e.g., Proteus mirabilis, Serratia marcesens
  • virus e.g., Herpes simplex virus, herpes zoster virus
  • fungus e.g. fungi from the genus Fusarium
  • yeast
  • protozoan e.g., Giardia lamblia
  • nematodes e.g., Onchocercus volvulus
  • worm e.g., Dirofilaria immitis
  • amoeba e.g., Acanthameoba
  • the concentration of the preservative is between about 0.0001%and about 1%, about 0.001%and about 0.8%, about 0.004%and about 0.5%, about 0.008 %and about 0.1%, and about 0.01%and about 0.08%. In some cases, the concentration of the preservatives is about 0.001%, 0.002%, 0.003%, 0.004%, 0.005%, 0.006%, 0.008%, 0.009%, 0.009%, 0.01%, 0.015%, 0.02%, 0.025%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%or 1.0%.
  • the preservative is selected from benzalkonium chloride, cetrimonium, sodium perborate, stabilized oxychloro complex, SofZia (Alcon) , polyquaternium-1, chlorobutanol, edetate disodium, and polyhexamethylene biguanide.
  • the composition described herein is stored in a plastic container.
  • the material of the plastic container comprises high density polyethylene (HDPE) , low density polyethylene (LDPE) , polyethylene terephthalate (PET) , polyvinyl chloride (PVC) , polyprolyene (PP) , polystyrene (PS) , fluorine treated HDPE, post consumer resin (PCR) , K-resine (SBC) , or bioplastic.
  • the material of the plastic container comprises LDPE.
  • the composition described herein is stored in a plastic container.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.8. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.7. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.6. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.5. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.4. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.3. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.2. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.1.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.8. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.7. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.6. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.5. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.4. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.3.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.2. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.1. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.0.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 80%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 85%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 90%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 93%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 95%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 97%after extended period of time under storage condition.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 98%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 99%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some instances, the storage condition comprises a temperatue of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60°C. In some instances, the extended period of time is at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 80%at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 85%at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 90%at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 93%at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 95%at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 97%at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 98%at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 99%at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 80%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 85%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 90%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 93%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 95%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 97%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 98%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 99%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.4%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.3%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.2%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.1%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition.
  • the storage condition comprises a temperatue of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C.
  • the extended period of time is at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.4%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.3%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.2%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.1%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 °C, about 40 °C, or about 60 °C.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.4%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.3%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.2%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.1%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
  • the composition described herein is stored in a glass container.
  • the glass container is a glass vial, such as for example, a type I, type II or type III glass vial.
  • the glass container is a type I glass vial.
  • the type I glass vial is a borasilicate glass vial.
  • the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
  • the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.8. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.7. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.6. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.5. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.4. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.3. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.2. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.1.
  • the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.8. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.7. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.6. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.5. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.4. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.3.
  • the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.2. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.1. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.0.
  • the composition described herein is formulaed as an aqueous solution.
  • the aqueous solution is a stable aqueous solution.
  • the aqueous solution is stored in a plastic container as described above.
  • the aqueous solution is not stored in a glass container.
  • the aqueous solution is stored in the dark.
  • the aqueous solution is stored in the presence of light.
  • the aqueous solution is stable in the presence of light.
  • stabilizers that are useful in the ophthalmically acceptable formulations disclosed herein include, for example, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, alcohols, long chain fatty acid esters, long chain ethers, hydrophilic derivatives of fatty acids, polyvinyl pyrrolidones, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl alcohols, hydrocarbons, hydrophobic polymers, moisture-absorbing polymers, and combinations thereof.
  • amide analogues of stabilizers are also used.
  • the chosen stabilizer changes the hydrophobicity of the formulation, improves the mixing of various components in the formulation, controls the moisture level in the formula, or controls the mobility of the phase.
  • stabilizers are present in sufficient amounts to inhibit the degradation of the ophthalmic agent.
  • stabilizing agents include, but are not limited to: glycerol, methionine, monothioglycerol, EDTA, ascorbic acid, polysorbate 80, polysorbate 20, arginine, heparin, dextran sulfate, cyclodextrins, pentosan polysulfate and other heparinoids, divalent cations such as magnesium and zinc, or combinations thereof.
  • Additional useful stabilization agents for ophthalmically acceptable formulations include one or more anti-aggregation additives to enhance stability of ophthalmic formulations by reducing the rate of protein aggregation.
  • the anti-aggregation additive selected depends upon the nature of the conditions to which the ophthalmic agents are exposed. For example, certain formulations undergoing agitation and thermal stress require a different anti-aggregation additive than a formulation undergoing lyophilization and reconstitution.
  • Useful anti-aggregation additives include, by way of example only, urea, guanidinium chloride, simple amino acids such as glycine or arginine, sugars, polyalcohols, polysorbates, polymers such as polyethylene glycol and dextrans, alkyl saccharides, such as alkyl glycoside, and surfactants.
  • antioxidants include, by way of example only, ascorbic acid, methionine, sodium thiosulfate and sodium metabisulfite.
  • antioxidants are selected from metal chelating agents, thiol containing compounds and other general stabilizing agents.
  • compositions include one or more ophthalmically acceptable surfactants to enhance physical stability or for other purposes.
  • Suitable nonionic surfactants include, but are not limited to, polyoxyethylene fatty acid glycerides and vegetable oils, e.g., polyoxyethylene (60) hydrogenated castor oil; and polyoxyethylene alkylethers and alkylphenyl ethers, e.g., octoxynol 10, octoxynol 40.
  • the ophthalmically acceptable pharmaceutical formulations described herein are stable with respect to compound degradation (e.g. less than 30%degradation, less than 25%degradation, less than 20%degradation, less than 15%degradation, less than 10%degradation, less than 8%degradation, less than 5%degradation, less than 3%degradation, less than 2%degradation, or less than 5%degradation) over a period of any of at least about 1 day, at least about 2 days, at least about 3 days, at least about 4 days, at least about 5 days, at least about 6 days, at least about 1 week, at least about 2 weeks, at least about 3 weeks, at least about 4 weeks, at least about 5 weeks, at least about 6 weeks, at least about 7 weeks, at least about 8 weeks, at least about 3 months, at least about 4 months, at least about 5 months, or at least about 6 months under storage conditions (e.g. room temperature) .
  • the formulations described herein are stable with respect to compound degradation over a
  • an additional surfactant (co-surfactant) and/or buffering agent is combined with one or more of the pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles previously described herein so that the surfactant and/or buffering agent maintains the product at an optimal pH for stability.
  • Suitable co-surfactants include, but are not limited to: a) natural and synthetic lipophilic agents, e.g., phospholipids, cholesterol, and cholesterol fatty acid esters and derivatives thereof; b) nonionic surfactants, which include for example, polyoxyethylene fatty alcohol esters, sorbitan fatty acid esters (Spans) , polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters (e.g., polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monooleate (Tween 80) , polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monostearate (Tween 60) , polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate (Tween 20) and other Tweens, sorbitan esters, glycerol esters, e
  • one or more co-surfactants when utilized in the ophthalmically acceptable formulations of the present disclosure, they are combined, e.g., with a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle and is present in the final formulation, e.g., in an amount ranging from about 0.1%to about 20%, from about 0.5%to about 10%.
  • the surfactant has an HLB value of 0 to 20. In additional embodiments, the surfactant has an HLB value of 0 to 3, of 4 to 6, of 7 to 9, of 8 to 18, of 13 to 15, of 10 to 18.
  • Typical ophthalmic aqueous solutions are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops.
  • a single administration (i.e., a single dose) of an ophthalmic aqueous solution may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient.
  • one dose of the ophthalmic aqueous solution described herein is one drop of the aqueous solution composition from the eye drop bottle.
  • described herein include ophthalmic aqueous compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
  • the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 50%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 40%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 30%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 20%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 10%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 5%.
  • the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 10 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 8 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 5 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 3 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 2 consecutive doses.
  • a nonsettling formulation should not require shaking to disperse drug uniformly.
  • a “no-shake” formulation is potentially advantageous over formulations that require shaking for the simple reason that patients’ shaking behavior is a major source of variability in the amount of drug dosed. It has been reported that patients often times do not or forget to shake their ophthalmic compositions that requires shaking before administering a dose, despite the instructions to shake that were clearly marked on the label. On the other hand, even for those patients who do shake the product, it is normally not possible to determine whether the shaking is adequate in intensity and/or duration to render the product uniform.
  • the ophthalmic compositions described herein are “no-shake” formulations that maintained the dose-to-dose uniformity described herein.
  • drop bottles or tubes containing the ophthalmic (aqueous) compositions are stored upright for a minimum of 12 hours prior to the start of the test.
  • predetermined number of drops or strips are dispensed from each commercial bottles or tubes at predetermined time intervals for an extended period of time or until no product was left in the bottle or tube. All drops and strips are dispensed into tared glass vials, capped, and stored at room temperature until analysis.
  • the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 10 to about 50,000 cps at about 20 °C and sheer rate of 1s -1 . In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 100 to about 40,000 cps at about 20°C and sheer rate of 1s -1 . In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 500 to about 30,000 cps at about 20°C and sheer rate of 1s -1 . In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 1000 to about 20,000 cps at about 20 °C and sheer rate of 1s -1 .
  • the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 2000 to about 10,000 cps at about 20 °C and sheer rate of 1s -1 . In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 4000 to about 8000 cps at about 20 °C and sheer rate of 1s -1 .
  • the ophthalmic aqueous formulation contains a viscosity enhancing agent sufficient to provide a viscosity of between about 500 and 50,000 centipoise, between about 750 and 50,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 50,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 40,000 centipoise; between about 2000 and 30,000 centipoise; between about 3000 and 20,000 centipoise; between about 4000 and 10,000 centipoise, or between about 5000 and 8000 centipoise.
  • a viscosity enhancing agent sufficient to provide a viscosity of between about 500 and 50,000 centipoise, between about 750 and 50,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 50,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 40,000 centipoise; between about 2000 and 30,000 centipoise; between about 3000 and 20,000 centipoise; between about 4000 and 10,000 centipoise, or between
  • the pH of a composition described herein is adjusted (e.g., by use of a buffer and/or a pH adjusting agent) to an ophthalmically compatible pH range of from about 4.0 to about 9.0.
  • the ophthalmic composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0.
  • the ophthalmic composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0.
  • the ophthalmic composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
  • useful formulations also include one or more pH adjusting agents or buffering agents.
  • pH adjusting agents or buffers include, but are not limited to acetate, bicarbonate, ammonium chloride, citrate, phosphate, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof and combinations or mixtures thereof.
  • one or more buffers when utilized in the formulations of the present disclosure, they are combined, e.g., with a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle and are present in the final formulation, e.g., in an amount ranging from about 0.1%to about 20%, from about 0.5%to about 10%.
  • the amount of buffer included in the formulations is such that the pH of the formulation does not interfere with the body's natural buffering system.
  • diluents are also used to stabilize compounds because they can provide a more stable environment.
  • Salts dissolved in buffered solutions are utilized as diluents in the art, including, but not limited to a phosphate buffered saline solution.
  • the ophthalmic composition described herein has a pH of from about 4.0-9.0, from about 5.0 to about 8.0, from about 6.5 to about 8.0, from about 6.5 and about 8.0, or from about 7.0 and about 8.0.
  • the ophthalmic composition described herein has a pH of 6.0, about 6.1, about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, about 6.5, about 6.6, about 6.7, about 6.8, about 6.9, about 7.0, about 7.1, about 7.2, about 7.3, about 7.4, about 7.5, about 7.6, about 7.7, about 7.8, about 7.9, about 8.0, about 8.1, about 8.2, about 8.3, about 8.4, about 8.5, about 8.6, about 8.7, about 8.8, about 8.9, about 9.0.
  • the pharmaceutical formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of any of at least about 1 day, at least about 2 days, at least about 3 days, at least about 4 days, at least about 5 days, at least about 6 days, at least about 1 week, at least about 2 weeks, at least about 3 weeks, at least about 4 weeks, at least about 5 weeks, at least about 6 weeks, at least about 7 weeks, at least about 8 weeks, at least about 1 month, at least about 2 months, at least about 3 months, at least about 4 months, at least about 5 months, at least about 6 months, at least about 7 months, at least about 8 months, at least about 9 months, at least about 10 months, at least about 11 months, at least about 12 months, at least about 18 months, at least about 24 months, at least about 3 years, at least about 4 years, at least about 5 years, or more.
  • the formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 1 week. In other embodiments, the formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 2 weeks. In other embodiments, the formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 3 weeks. In other embodiments, the formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 1 month. Also described herein are formulations that are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 2 months, or more.
  • a composition disclosed herein is formulated in order to not disrupt the ionic balance of the eye.
  • a composition disclosed herein has an ionic balance that is the same as or substantially the same as the eye.
  • a composition disclosed herein does not does not disrupt the ionic balance of the eye.
  • “practical osmolarity/osmolality” or “deliverable osmolarity/osmolality” means the osmolarity/osmolality of a composition as determined by measuring the osmolarity/osmolality of the ophthalmic agent and all excipients except the gelling and/or the thickening agent (e.g., polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose or the like) .
  • the practical osmolarity of a composition disclosed herein is measured by a suitable method, e.g., a freezing point depression method as described in Viegas et. al., Int. J. Pharm., 1998, 160, 157-162.
  • the practical osmolarity of a composition disclosed herein is measured by vapor pressure osmometry (e.g., vapor pressure depression method) that allows for determination of the osmolarity of a composition at higher temperatures.
  • the osmolarity at a target site of action is about the same as the delivered osmolarity of a composition described herein.
  • a composition described herein has a deliverable osmolarity of about 150 mOsm/L to about 500 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 500 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 350 mOsm/L, about 280 mOsm/L to about 370 mOsm/L or about 250 mOsm/L to about 320 mOsm/L.
  • the practical osmolality of an ophthalmic composition disclosed herein is from about 100 mOsm/kg to about 1000 mOsm/kg, from about 200 mOsm/kg to about 800 mOsm/kg, from about 250 mOsm/kg to about 500 mOsm/kg, or from about 250 mOsm/kg to about 320 mOsm/kg, or from about 250 mOsm/kg to about 350 mOsm/kg or from about 280 mOsm/kg to about 320 mOsm/kg.
  • a composition described herein has a practical osmolarity of about 100 mOsm/L to about 1000 mOsm/L, about 200 mOsm/L to about 800 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 500 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 350 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 320 mOsm/L, or about 280 mOsm/L to about 320 mOsm/L.
  • suitable tonicity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to any pharmaceutically acceptable sugar, salt or any combinations or mixtures thereof, such as, but not limited to dextrose, glycerin, mannitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride, and other electrolytes.
  • the tonicity adjusting agent is selected from sodium chloride, sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, sodium bisulfate, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, zinc chloride, potassium acetate, sodium acetate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium thiosulfate, magnesium sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, dextrose, mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, sucrose, urea, propylene glycol, glycerin, or a combination thereof.
  • the ophthalmic compositions described herein include one or more salts in an amount required to bring osmolality of the composition into an acceptable range.
  • Such salts include those having sodium, potassium or ammonium cations and chloride, citrate, ascorbate, borate, phosphate, bicarbonate, sulfate, thiosulfate or bisulfite anions; suitable salts include sodium chloride, potassium chloride, sodium thiosulfate, sodium bisulfite and ammonium sulfate.
  • the compositions are sterilized. Included within the embodiments disclosed herein are means and processes for sterilization of a pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein for use in humans. The goal is to provide a safe pharmaceutical product, relatively free of infection causing micro-organisms.
  • the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has provided regulatory guidance in the publication “Guidance for Industry: Sterile Drug Products Produced by Aseptic Processing” available at: http: //www. fda. gov/cder/guidance/5882fnl. htm, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • sterilization means a process used to destroy or remove microorganisms that are present in a product or packaging. Any suitable method available for sterilization of objects and compositions is used. Available methods for the inactivation of microorganisms include, but are not limited to, the application of extreme heat, lethal chemicals, or gamma radiation.
  • a process for the preparation of an ophthalmic formulation comprises subjecting the formulation to a sterilization method selected from heat sterilization, chemical sterilization, radiation sterilization or filtration sterilization. The method used depends largely upon the nature of the device or composition to be sterilized. Detailed descriptions of many methods of sterilization are given in Chapter 40 of Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy published by Lippincott, Williams &Wilkins, and is incorporated by reference with respect to this subject matter.
  • Filtration sterilization is a method used to remove but not destroy microorganisms from solutions.
  • Membrane filters are used to filter heat-sensitive solutions. Such filters are thin, strong, homogenous polymers of mixed cellulosic esters (MCE) , polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF; also known as PVDF) , or polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and have pore sizes ranging from 0.1 to 0.22 ⁇ m. Solutions of various characteristics are optionally filtered using different filter membranes. For example, PVF and PTFE membranes are well suited to filtering organic solvents while aqueous solutions are filtered through PVF or MCE membranes.
  • MCE mixed cellulosic esters
  • PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • Filter apparatus are available for use on many scales ranging from the single point-of-use disposable filter attached to a syringe up to commercial scale filters for use in manufacturing plants.
  • the membrane filters are sterilized by autoclave or chemical sterilization. Validation of membrane filtration systems is performed following standardized protocols (Microbiological Evaluation of Filters for Sterilizing Liquids, Vol 4, No. 3. Washington, D.C: Health Industry Manufacturers Association, 1981) and involve challenging the membrane filter with a known quantity (ca. 10 7/ cm 2 ) of unusually small microorganisms, such as Brevundimonas diminuta (ATCC 19146) .
  • compositions are optionally sterilized by passing through membrane filters.
  • Formulations comprising nanoparticles (U.S. Pat No. 6,139,870) or multilamellar vesicles (Richard et al., International Journal of Pharmaceutics (2006) , 312 (1-2) : 144-50) are amenable to sterilization by filtration through 0.22 ⁇ m filters without destroying their organized structure.
  • the methods disclosed herein comprise sterilizing the formulation (or components thereof) by means of filtration sterilization.
  • filtration is carried out below (e.g. about 5 °C) the gel temperature (Tgel) of a formulation described herein and with viscosity that allows for filtration in a reasonable time using a peristaltic pump (e.g. below a theoretical value of 100 cP ) .
  • ophthalmic formulations that prevent degradation of polymeric components (e.g., thermosetting and/or other viscosity enhancing agents) and/or the ophthalmic agent during the process of sterilization.
  • degradation of the ophthalmic agent is reduced or eliminated through the use of specific pH ranges for buffer components and specific proportions of viscosity enhancing agents in the formulations.
  • the choice of an appropriate viscosity enhancing agents or thermosetting polymer allows for sterilization of formulations described herein by filtration.
  • the use of an appropriate thermosetting polymer or other viscosity enhancing agents in combination with a specific pH range for the formulation allows for high temperature sterilization of formulations described with substantially no degradation of the therapeutic agent or the polymeric excipients.
  • An advantage of the methods of sterilization provided herein is that, in certain instances, the formulations are subjected to terminal sterilization via autoclaving without any loss of the ophthalmic agent and/or excipients and/or viscosity enhancing agents during the sterilization step and are rendered substantially free of microbes and/or pyrogens.
  • the radiation commonly employed is beta radiation or alternatively, gamma radiation from a 60 Co source.
  • the penetrating ability of gamma radiation allows its use in the sterilization of many product types, including solutions, compositions and heterogeneous mixtures.
  • the germicidal effects of irradiation arise from the interaction of gamma radiation with biological macromolecules. This interaction generates charged species and free-radicals. Subsequent chemical reactions, such as rearrangements and cross-linking processes, result in the loss of normal function for these biological macromolecules.
  • the formulations described herein are also optionally sterilized using beta irradiation.
  • One method is through the use of a saturated steam autoclave.
  • saturated steam at a temperature of at least 121 °C is allowed to contact the object to be sterilized.
  • the transfer of heat is either directly to the microorganism, in the case of an object to be sterilized, or indirectly to the microorganism by heating the bulk of an aqueous solution to be sterilized.
  • This method is widely practiced as it allows flexibility, safety and economy in the sterilization process.
  • the compositions are substantially free of microorganisms.
  • Acceptable bioburden or sterility levels are based on applicable standards that define therapeutically acceptable compositions, including but not limited to United States Pharmacopeia Chapters ⁇ 1111> et seq.
  • acceptable sterility (e.g., bioburden) levels include about 10 colony forming units (cfu) per gram of formulation, about 50 cfu per gram of formulation, about 100 cfu per gram of formulation, about 500 cfu per gram of formulation or about 1000 cfu per gram of formulation.
  • acceptable bioburden levels or sterility for formulations include less than 10 cfu/mL, less that 50 cfu/mL, less than 500 cfu/mL or less than 1000 cfu/mL microbial agents.
  • acceptable bioburden levels or sterility include the exclusion of specified objectionable microbiological agents.
  • specified objectionable microbiological agents include but are not limited to Escherichia coli (E. coli) , Salmonella sp., Pseudomonas aeruginosa (P. aeruginosa) and/or other specific microbial agents.
  • Sterility testing is performed by two methods. The first is direct inoculation wherein a sample of the composition to be tested is added to growth medium and incubated for a period of time up to 21 days. Turbidity of the growth medium indicates contamination. Drawbacks to this method include the small sampling size of bulk materials which reduces sensitivity, and detection of microorganism growth based on a visual observation.
  • An alternative method is membrane filtration sterility testing. In this method, a volume of product is passed through a small membrane filter paper. The filter paper is then placed into media to promote the growth of microorganisms.
  • the commercially available Millipore Steritest sterility testing system is optionally used for determinations by membrane filtration sterility testing.
  • Steritest filter system No. TLHVSL210 are used.
  • emulsions or viscous products Steritest filter system No. TLAREM210 or TDAREM210 are used.
  • TTHASY210 are used.
  • TTHVA210 is used for the filtration testing of material dispensed as an aerosol or foam Steritest filter system No. TTHVA210.
  • TTHADA210 or TTHADV210 are used.
  • the ophthalmic formulation described herein has less than about 60 colony forming units (CFU) , less than about 50 colony forming units, less than about 40 colony forming units, or less than about 30 colony forming units of microbial agents per gram of formulation. In certain embodiments, the ophthalmic formulations described herein are formulated to be isotonic with the eye.
  • CFU colony forming units
  • the ophthalmic formulations described herein are formulated to be isotonic with the eye.
  • An additional aspect of the sterilization process is the removal of by-products from the killing of microorganisms (hereinafter, “Pro ” ) .
  • the process of depyrogenation removes pyrogens from the sample.
  • Pyrogens are endotoxins or exotoxins which induce an immune response.
  • An example of an endotoxin is the lipopolysaccharide (LPS) molecule found in the cell wall of gram-negative bacteria. While sterilization procedures such as autoclaving or treatment with ethylene oxide kill the bacteria, the LPS residue induces a proinflammatory immune response, such as septic shock. Because the molecular size of endotoxins can vary widely, the presence of endotoxins is expressed in “endotoxin units” (EU) .
  • EU endotoxin units
  • One EU is equivalent to 100 picograms of E. coli LPS. Humans can develop a response to as little as 5 EU/kg of body weight.
  • the bioburden (e.g., microbial limit) and/or sterility (e.g., endotoxin level) is expressed in any units as recognized in the art.
  • ophthalmic compositions described herein contain lower endotoxin levels (e.g. ⁇ 4 EU/kg of body weight of a subject) when compared to conventionally acceptable endotoxin levels (e.g., 5 EU/kg of body weight of a subject) . In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/kg of body weight of a subject.
  • the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 4 EU/kg of body weight of a subject. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 3 EU/kg of body weight of a subject. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 2 EU/kg of body weight of a subject.
  • the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/kg of formulation. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 4 EU/kg of formulation. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 3 EU/kg of formulation. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/kg Product. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 1 EU/kg Product. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 0.2 EU/kg Product. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/g of unit or Product. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 4 EU/g of unit or Product.
  • the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 3 EU/g of unit or Product. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/mg of unit or Product. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 4 EU/mg of unit or Product. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 3 EU/mg of unit or Product. In certain embodiments, ophthalmic formulations described herein contain from about 1 to about 5 EU/mL of formulation. In certain embodiments, ophthalmic formulations described herein contain from about 2 to about 5 EU/mL of formulation, from about 3 to about 5 EU/mL of formulation, or from about 4 to about 5 EU/mL of formulation.
  • ophthalmic compositions described herein contain lower endotoxin levels (e.g. ⁇ 0.5 EU/mL of formulation) when compared to conventionally acceptable endotoxin levels (e.g., 0.5 EU/mL of formulation) .
  • the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 0.5 EU/mL of formulation. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 0.4 EU/mL of formulation. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 0.2 EU/mL of formulation.
  • Pyrogen detection by way of example only, is performed by several methods. Suitable tests for sterility include tests described in United States Pharmacopoeia (USP) ⁇ 71> Sterility Tests (23rd edition, 1995) . The rabbit pyrogen test and the Limulus amebocyte lysate test are both specified in the United States Pharmacopeia Chapters ⁇ 85> and ⁇ 151> (USP23/NF 18, Biological Tests, The United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Rockville, MD, 1995) . Alternative pyrogen assays have been developed based upon the monocyte activation-cytokine assay.
  • the ophthalmic formulation is subject to depyrogenation.
  • the process for the manufacture of the ophthalmic formulation comprises testing the formulation for pyrogenicity.
  • the formulations described herein are substantially free of pyrogens.
  • Gels have been defined in various ways. For example, the United States Pharmacopoeia defines gels as semisolid systems consisting of either suspensions made up of small inorganic particles or large organic molecules interpenetrated by a liquid. Gels include a single-phase or a two-phase system. A single-phase gel consists of organic macromolecules distributed uniformly throughout a liquid in such a manner that no apparent boundaries exist between the dispersed macromolecules and the liquid. Some single-phase gels are prepared from synthetic macromolecules (e.g., carbomer) or from natural gums, (e.g., tragacanth) . In some embodiments, single-phase gels are generally aqueous, but will also be made using alcohols and oils. Two-phase gels consist of a network of small discrete particles.
  • Gels can also be classified as being hydrophobic or hydrophilic.
  • the base of a non-limiting example of a hydrophobic gel includes a liquid paraffin with polyethylene or fatty oils gelled with colloidal silica, or aluminum or zinc soaps.
  • the base of a non-limiting example of a hydrophilic gel includes water, glycerol, or propylene glycol gelled with a suitable gelling agent (e.g., tragacanth, starch, cellulose derivatives, carboxyvinylpolymers, and magnesium-aluminum silicates) .
  • the rheology of the compositions disclosed herein is pseudo plastic, plastic, thixotropic, or dilatant.
  • the ophthalmic composition is an ophthalmic gel
  • the ophthalmically acceptable carrier comprises water and at least one viscosity-enhancing agent.
  • the viscosity-enhancing agent is selected from cellulose-based polymers, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene triblock copolymers, dextran-based polymers, polyvinyl alcohol, dextrin, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyalkylene glycols, chitosan, collagen, gelatin, hyaluronic acid, or combinations thereof.
  • the ophthalmic gel composition described herein is a semi-solid or id in a gelled state before it is topically administered (e.g. at room temperature) .
  • suitable viscosity-enhancing agents for such gels include by way of example only, gelling agents and suspending agents.
  • the enhanced viscosity formulation does not include a buffer.
  • the enhanced viscosity formulation includes a pharmaceutically acceptable buffer. Sodium chloride or other tonicity agents are optionally used to adjust tonicity, if necessary.
  • the ophthalmically acceptable viscosity agent includes hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carboxymethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, sodium chondroitin sulfate, sodium hyaluronate.
  • viscosity enhancing agents compatible with the targeted ocular site include, but are not limited to, acacia (gum arabic) , agar, aluminum magnesium silicate, sodium alginate, sodium stearate, bladderwrack, bentonite, carbomer, carrageenan, Carbopol, xanthan, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose (MCC) , ceratonia, chitin, carboxymethylated chitosan, chondrus, dextrose, furcellaran, gelatin, Ghatti gum, guar gum, hectorite, lactose, sucrose, maltodextrin, mannitol, sorbitol, honey, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, sterculia gum, xanthum gum, gum tragacanth, ethyl cellulose, ethylhydroxyethyl cellulose, ethylmethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose,
  • the viscosity-enhancing excipient is a combination of MCC and CMC.
  • the viscosity-enhancing agent is a combination of carboxymethylated chitosan, or chitin, and alginate.
  • the combination of chitin and alginate with the ophthalmic agents disclosed herein acts as a controlled release formulation, restricting the diffusion of the ophthalmic agents from the formulation.
  • the combination of carboxymethylated chitosan and alginate is optionally used to assist in increasing the permeability of the ophthalmic agents in the eye.
  • an enhanced viscosity formulation comprising from about 0.1 mM and about 100 mM of an ophthalmic agent, a pharmaceutically acceptable viscosity agent, and water for injection, the concentration of the viscosity agent in the water being sufficient to provide a enhanced viscosity formulation with a final viscosity from about 100 to about 100,000 cP.
  • the viscosity of the gel is in the range from about 100 to about 50,000 cP, about 100 cP to about 1,000 cP, about 500 cP to about 1500 cP, about 1000 cP to about 3000 cP, about 2000 cP to about 8,000 cP, about 4,000 cP to about 50,000 cP, about 10,000 cP to about 500,000 cP, about 15,000 cP to about 1,000,000 cP.
  • the biocompatible gel when an even more viscous medium is desired, comprises at least about 35%, at least about 45%, at least about 55%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, or even at least about 80%or so by weight of the ophthalmic agent.
  • the biocompatible enhanced viscosity formulation comprises at least about 25%, at least about 35%, at least about 45%, at least about 55%, at least about 65%, at least about 75%, at least about 85%, at least about 90%or at least about 95%or more by weight of the ophthalmic agent.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable enhanced viscosity ophthalmically acceptable formulation comprises at least one ophthalmic agent and at least one gelling agent.
  • Suitable gelling agents for use in preparation of the gel formulation include, but are not limited to, celluloses, cellulose derivatives, cellulose ethers (e.g., carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, methylcellulose) , guar gum, xanthan gum, locust bean gum, alginates (e.g., alginic acid) , silicates, starch, tragacanth, carboxyvinyl polymers, carrageenan, paraffin, petrolatum and any combinations or mixtures thereof.
  • hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is utilized as the gelling agent.
  • the viscosity enhancing agents described herein are also utilized as the gelling agent for the gel formulations presented herein.
  • the ophthalmic gel composition described herein is an in situ gel formulation.
  • the in situ gel formation is based on increased pre-corneal residence time of the ophthalmic composition which improves ocular bioavailability, corneal mucoadhesion, lysosomal interaction and ionic gelation, improved corneal absorption, thermal gelation, or a combination thereof.
  • the in situ gel formulation is activated by pH, temperature, ion, UV, or solvent exchange.
  • the ophthalmic gel composition comprises one or more geling agents.
  • the geling agent includes, but is not limited to, poloxamer (e.g. Poloxamer 407) , tetronics, ethyl (hydroxyethyl) cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP) , carbopol (e.g. Carbopol 1342P NF, Carbopol 980 NF) , alginates (e.g. low acetyl gellan gum ) , gellan, hyaluronic acid, pluronics (e.g.
  • poloxamer e.g. Poloxamer 407
  • tetronics ethyl (hydroxyethyl) cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP)
  • carbopol e.g. Carbopol 1342P NF, Carbopol 980 NF
  • alginates e.g. low acetyl gellan gum
  • gellan hy
  • Pluronic F-127) chitosan, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) , polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) , dextran, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) , hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC) , methylcellulose (MC) , thiolated xyloglucan, polymethacrilic acid (PMMA) , polyethylene glycol (PEG) , pseudolatexes, xyloglucans, or combinations thereof.
  • PVA polyvinyl alcohol
  • PVP polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • HPMC hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose
  • HEC hydroxyethylcellulose
  • MC methylcellulose
  • PMMA polymethacrilic acid
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • pseudolatexes xyloglucans, or combinations thereof.
  • the in situ gel formation further comprises a permeation enhancer.
  • the permeation enhancer includes surfactants (e.g. non-ionic surfactants) , benzalkonium chloride, EDTA, surface-active heteroglycosides, calcium chelators, hydroxyl propyl beta cyclodextrin (HP beta CD) , bile salts, and the like.
  • gel formulations are useful depending upon the particular ophthalmic agent, other pharmaceutical agent or excipients/additives used, and as such are considered to fall within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • other commercially-available glycerin-based gels, glycerin-derived compounds, conjugated, or crosslinked gels, matrices, hydrogels, and polymers, as well as gelatins and their derivatives, alginates, and alginate-based gels, and even various native and synthetic hydrogel and hydrogel-derived compounds are all expected to be useful in the ophthalmic agent formulations described herein.
  • ophthalmically acceptable gels include, but are not limited to, alginate hydrogels (ConvaTec, Princeton, N.J. ) , Hydroactive Gel (ConvaTec) , Nu- (Johnson &Johnson Medical, Arlington, Tex. ) ; (V) Acemannan Hydrogel (Carrington Laboratories, Inc., Irving, Tex. ) ; glycerin gels Hydrogel (Swiss-American Products, Inc., Dallas, Tex. ) and Sterile (Johnson &Johnson) .
  • biodegradable biocompatible gels also represent compounds present in ophthalmically acceptable formulations disclosed and described herein.
  • the viscosity-enhancing agent is a cellulose-based polymer selected from cellulose gum, alkylcellulose, hydroxyl-alkyl cellulose, hydroxyl-alkyl alkylcellulose, carboxy-alkyl cellulose, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing agent is hydroxyl-alkyl alkylcellulose. In some embodiment, the viscosity-enhancing agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose.
  • the enhanced viscosity formulation is characterized by a phase transition between room temperature and body temperature (including an individual with a serious fever, e.g., up to about 42 °C) .
  • the phase transition occurs at 1 °Cbelow body temperature, at 2 °C below body temperature, at 3 °C below body temperature, at 4 °C below body temperature, at 6 °C below body temperature, at 8 °C below body temperature, or at 10 °C below body temperature.
  • the phase transition occurs at about 15 °C below body temperature, at about 20 °C below body temperature or at about 25 °C below body temperature.
  • the gelation temperature (Tgel) of a formulation described herein is about 20 °C, about 25 °C, or about 30 °C. In certain embodiments, the gelation temperature (Tgel) of a formulation described herein is about 35 °C, or about 40 °C. Included within the definition of body temperature is the body temperature of a healthy individual, or an unhealthy individual, including an individual with a fever (up to ⁇ 42 °C) . In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions described herein are liquids at about room temperature and are administered at or about room temperature.
  • Copolymers polyoxypropylene and polyoxyethylene (e.g. polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene triblock copolymers) form thermosetting gels when incorporated into aqueous solutions. These polymers have the ability to change from the liquid state to the gel state at temperatures close to body temperature, therefore allowing useful formulations that are applied to the targeted ocular site. The liquid state-to-gel state phase transition is dependent on the polymer concentration and the ingredients in the solution.
  • the amount of thermosetting polymer in any formulation described herein is about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, about 25%, about 30%, about 35%or about 40%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer in any formulation described herein is about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, about 15%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%, about 19%, about 20%, about 21%, about 22%, about 23%, about 24%or about 25%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 7.5%of the total weight of the formulation.
  • the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 7.5%of the total weight of the formulation.
  • the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 10%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 11%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 12%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 13%of the total weight of the formulation.
  • the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 14%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 15%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 16%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 17%of the total weight of the formulation.
  • the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 18%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 19%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 20%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 21%of the total weight of the formulation.
  • the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 23%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 25%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thickening agent (e.g., a gelling agent) in any formulation described herein is about 1%, about 5%, about 10%, or about 15%of the total weight of the formulation.
  • the amount of thickening agent (e.g., a gelling agent) in any formulation described herein is about 0.5%, about 1%, about 1.5%, about 2%, about 2.5%, about 3%, about 3.5%, about 4%, about 4.5%, or about 5%of the total weight of the formulation.
  • thermogel is a PEG-PLGA-PEG triblock copolymer (Jeong etal, Nature (1997) , 388: 860-2; Jeong etal, J. Control. Release (2000) , 63: 155-63; Jeong etal, Adv. Drug Delivery Rev. (2002) , 54: 37-51) .
  • the polymer exhibits sol-gel behavior over a concentration of about 5%w/w to about 40%w/w.
  • the lactide/glycolide molar ratio in the PLGA copolymer ranges from about 1: 1 to about 20: 1.
  • the resulting coploymers are soluble in water and form a free-flowing liquid at room temperature, but form a hydrogel at body temperature.
  • a commercially available PEG-PLGA-PEG triblock copolymer is RESOMER RGP t50106 manufactured by Boehringer Ingelheim. This material is composed of a PLGA copolymer of 50: 50 poly (DL-lactide-co-glycolide) and is 10%w/w of PEG and has a molecular weight of about 6000.
  • Additional biodegradable thermoplastic polyesters include (provided by Atrix Laboratories, Inc. ) and/or those disclosed, e.g., in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,324,519; 4,938,763; 5,702,716; 5,744,153; and 5,990,194; wherein the suitable biodegradable thermoplastic polyester is disclosed as a thermoplastic polymer.
  • suitable biodegradable thermoplastic polyesters include polylactides, polyglycolides, polycaprolactones, copolymers thereof, terpolymers thereof, and any combinations thereof.
  • the suitable biodegradable thermoplastic polyester is a polylactide, a polyglycolide, a copolymer thereof, a terpolymer thereof, or a combination thereof.
  • the biodegradable thermoplastic polyester is 50/50 poly (DL-lactide-co-glycolide) having a carboxy terminal group; is present in about 30 wt. %to about 40 wt. %of the composition; and has an average molecular weight of about 23,000 to about 45,000.
  • the biodegradable thermoplastic polyester is 75/25 poly (DL-lactide-co-glycolide) without a carboxy terminal group; is present in about 40 wt.
  • the terminal groups of the poly (DL-lactide-co-glycolide) are either hydroxyl, carboxyl, or ester depending upon the method of polymerization.
  • Polycondensation of lactic or glycolic acid provides a polymer with terminal hydroxyl and carboxyl groups.
  • Ring-opening polymerization of the cyclic lactide or glycolide monomers with water, lactic acid, or glycolic acid provides polymers with the same terminal groups.
  • ring-opening of the cyclic monomers with a monofunctional alcohol such as methanol, ethanol, or 1-dodecanol provides a polymer with one hydroxyl group and one ester terminal groups.
  • Ring-opening polymerization of the cyclic monomers with a diol such as 1, 6-hexanediol or polyethylene glycol provides a polymer with only hydroxyl terminal groups.
  • thermosetting gels dissolve more completely at reduced temperatures
  • methods of solubilization include adding the required amount of polymer to the amount of water to be used at reduced temperatures. Generally after wetting the polymer by shaking, the mixture is capped and placed in a cold chamber or in a thermostatic container at about 0-10 °C in order to dissolve the polymer. The mixture is stirred or shaken to bring about a more rapid dissolution of the thermosetting gel polymer.
  • the ophthalmic agent and various additives such as buffers, salts, and preservatives are subsequently added and dissolved. In some instances the pharmaceutically agent is suspended if it is insoluble in water.
  • the pH is modulated by the addition of appropriate buffering agents.
  • An ointment is a homogeneous, viscous, semi-solid preparation, most commonly a greasy, thick oil (e.g. oil 80%-water 20%) with a high viscosity, intended for external application to the skin or mucous membranes.
  • Ointments have a Water number that defines the maximum amount of water that it can contain. They are used as emollients or for the application of active ingredients to the skin for protective, therapeutic, or prophylactic purposes and where a degree of occlusion is desired.
  • Ointments are used topically on a variety of body surfaces. These include the skin and the mucous membranes of the eye (an eye ointment) , vulva, anus, and nose
  • the vehicle of an ointment is known as the ointment base.
  • the choice of a base depends upon the clinical indication for the ointment.
  • the different types of ointment bases are: hydrocarbon bases, e.g. hard paraffin, soft paraffin, microcrystalline wax and ceresine; absorption bases, e.g. wool fat, beeswax; water soluble bases, e.g. macrogols 200, 300, 400; emulsifying bases, e.g. emulsifying wax, cetrimide; vegetable oils, e.g. olive oil, coconut oil, sesame oil, almond oil and peanut oil.
  • Ointments are formulated using hydrophobic, hydrophilic, or water-emulsifying bases to provide preparations that are immiscible, miscible, or emulsifiable with skin secretions. They can also be derived from hydrocarbon (fatty) , absorption, water-removable, or water-soluble bases.
  • the active agents are dispersed in the base, and later they get divided after the drug penetration into the target sites (e.g. membranes, skins, etc. ) .
  • poly (ethylene-glycols) , polyethoxylated castor oils (EL) , alcohols having 12 to 20 carbon atoms or a mixture of two or more of said components are effective excipients for dispersing and/or dissolving effective amounts of ophthalmic drugs, in particular of ascomycins and staurosporine derivatives, in an ointment base, in particular in an ointment base substantially comprising oleaginous and hydrocarbon components, and that the resulting ointments are excellently tolerated by the skin and by ocular tissue.
  • ophthalmic drugs such as a a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof, incorporated in the ointment compositions describes herein can effectively target the choroid and/or retina in a patient when the compositions are topically administered to the ocular surface, in particular to the sclera of said patient.
  • an ophthalmic ointment composition includes an ophthalmic drug, an ointment base and an agent for dispersing and/or dissolving said drug in the ointment base, selected from a poly (ethylene-glycol) , a polyethoxylated castor oil, an alcohol having 12 to 20 carbon atoms and a mixture of two or more of said components.
  • the ointment bases include ophthalmically acceptable oil and fat bases, such as natural wax e.g. white and yellow bees wax, carnauba wax, wool wax (wool fat) , purified lanolin, anhydrous lanolin; petroleum wax e.g. hard paraffin, microcrystalline wax; hydrocarbons e.g. liquid paraffin, white and yellow soft paraffin, white petrolatum, yellow petrolatum; or combinations thereof.
  • natural wax e.g. white and yellow bees wax, carnauba wax, wool wax (wool fat)
  • purified lanolin anhydrous lanolin
  • petroleum wax e.g. hard paraffin, microcrystalline wax
  • hydrocarbons e.g. liquid paraffin, white and yellow soft paraffin, white petrolatum, yellow petrolatum; or combinations thereof.
  • the ointment base may be present in amounts of about 50 to about 95, preferably of 70 to 90%by weight based on the total weight of the composition.
  • a preferred ointment base comprises a combination of one or more of one or more natural waxes like those indicated above, preferably wool wax (wool fat) , and one or more hydrocarbons like those indicated above, preferably a soft paraffin or a petrolatum, more preferably in combination with liquid paraffin.
  • a special embodiment of the aforementioned ointment base comprises e.g. 5 to 17 parts by weight of wool fat, and 50 to 65 parts by weight of white petrolatum as well as 20 to 30 parts by weight of liquid paraffin.
  • the agent for dispersing and/or dissolving the ophthalmic drug in the ointment base may be selected from a poly (ethylene-glycol) , a polyethoxylated castor oil, an alcohol having 12 to 20 carbon atoms and a mixture of two or more of said components.
  • the agent is preferably used in amounts of 1 to 20 percent, more preferably 1 to 10 percent by weight of the entire semisolid ophthalmic composition.
  • Alcohols having 12 to 20 carbon atoms include particularly stearyl alcohol (C18H37OH) , cetyl alcohol (C 16 H 33 OH) and mixtures thereof.
  • stearyl alcohol C18H37OH
  • cetyl alcohol C 16 H 33 OH
  • cetostearyl alcohols mixtures of solid alcohols substantially consisting of stearyl and cetyl alcohol and preferably comprising not less than 40 percent by weight of stearyl alcohol and a sum of stearyl alcohol and cetyl alcohol amounting to at least 90 percent by weight
  • compositions comprising not less than 80 percent by weight of cetylstearyl alcohol and an emulsifier, in particular sodium cetostearyl sulfate and/or sodium lauryl sulfate, preferably in amounts not less than 7 percent by weight of emulsifier.
  • Poly (ethylene-glycols) are used in some embodiments as the agent for dispersing and/or dissolving the ophthalmic drug in the ointment base according to the present disclosure.
  • Suitable poly (ethylene-glycol) s are typically mixtures of polymeric compounds of the general formula H- (OCH2-CH2) nOH, wherein the index n may typically range from 4 to 230 and the mean molecular weight from about 200 to about 10000.
  • n is a number from about 6 to about 22 and the mean molecular weight between about 300 and about 1000, more preferably n ranges from about 6 to about 13 and the mean molecular weight from about 300 to about 600, most preferably n has a value of about 8.5 to about 9 and the relative molecular weight is about 400.
  • Suitable poly (ethylene-glycols) are readily available commercially, for example poly (ethylene-glycols) having a mean molecular weight of about 200, 300, 400, 600, 1000, 1500, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000, 8000 and 10000.
  • poly (ethylene-glycols) are preferably used in amounts of 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5 percent by weight of the entire semisolid ophthalmic composition.
  • compositions according to the instant disclosure comprises an agent for dispersing and/or dissolving of the drug in the ointment base which is selected from a poly (ethylene-glycol) , a polyethoxylated castor oil and preferably a mixture of said components.
  • the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 10,000 to about 300,000 cps at about 20 °C and sheer rate of 1s -1 . In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 15,000 to about 200,000 cps at about 20 °C and sheer rate of 1s -1 . In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 50,000 to about 150,000 cps at about 20°C and sheer rate of 1s -1 . In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 70,000 to about 130,000 cps at about 20 °C and sheer rate of 1s -1 . In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 90,000 to about 110,000 cps at about 20 °C and sheer rate of 1s -1 .
  • the ophthalmic gel formulation contains a viscosity enhancing agent sufficient to provide a viscosity of between about 500 and 1,000,000 centipoise, between about 750 and 1,000,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 1,000,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 400,000 centipoise; between about 2000 and 100,000 centipoise; between about 3000 and 50,000 centipoise; between about 4000 and 25,000 centipoise; between about 5000 and 20,000 centipoise; or between about 6000 and 15,000 centipoise.
  • the ophthalmic gel formulation contains a viscosity enhancing agent sufficient to provide a viscosity of between about 50,0000 and 1,000,000 centipoise.
  • the compositions described herein are low viscosity compositions at body temperature.
  • low viscosity compositions contain from about 1%to about 10%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) .
  • low viscosity compositions contain from about 2%to about 10%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) .
  • low viscosity compositions contain from about 5%to about 10%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, low viscosity compositions are substantially free of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, a low viscosity ophthalmic agent composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 100 cP to about 10,000 cP.
  • a viscosity enhancing agent e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers
  • a low viscosity ophthalmic agent composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 500 cP to about 10,000 cP. In some embodiments, a low viscosity ophthalmic agent composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 1000 cP to about 10,000 cP.
  • the compositions described herein are viscous compositions at body temperature.
  • viscous compositions contain from about 10%to about 25%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) .
  • the viscous compositions contain from about 14%to about 22%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) .
  • the viscous compositions contain from about 15%to about 21%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) .
  • a viscous ophthalmic composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 100,000 cP to about 1,000,000 cP. In some embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 150,000 cP to about 500,000 cP. In some embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 250,000 cP to about 500,000 cP. In some of such embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition is a liquid at room temperature and gels at about between room temperature and body temperature (including an individual with a serious fever, e.g., up to about 42 °C) . In some embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition is administered as monotherapy for treatment of an ophthalmic disease or condition described herein.
  • the viscosity of the gel formulations presented herein is measured by any means described.
  • an LVDV-II+CP Cone Plate Viscometer and a Cone Spindle CPE-40 is used to calculate the viscosity of the gel formulation described herein.
  • a Brookfield (spindle and cup) viscometer is used to calculate the viscosity of the gel formulation described herein.
  • the viscosity ranges referred to herein are measured at room temperature. In other embodiments, the viscosity ranges referred to herein are measured at body temperature (e.g., at the average body temperature of a healthy human) .
  • Typical ophthalmic gels are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops.
  • a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic gel may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient.
  • typical ophthalmic ointments are packaged in tubes or other squeezable containers with a dispensing nozzle through which strips of the ointment are delivered.
  • a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic ointment may include a single strip, or multiple strips into the eyes of the patient.
  • one dose of the ophthalmic gel described herein is one drop of the gel composition from the eye drop bottle.
  • one dose of the ophthalmic ointment is one strip of the ointment composition dispensed through the nozzle of a dispersing tube.
  • described herein include ophthalmic gel compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
  • described herein include ophthalmic ointment compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
  • the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 50%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 40%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 30%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 20%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 10%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 5%.
  • the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 10 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 8 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 5 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 3 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 2 consecutive doses.
  • a nonsettling formulation should not require shaking to disperse drug uniformly.
  • a “no-shake” formulation is potentially advantageous over formulations that require shaking for the simple reason that patients’ shaking behavior is a major source of variability in the amount of drug dosed. It has been reported that patients often times do not or forget to shake their ophthalmic compositions that requires shaking before administering a dose, despite the instructions to shake that were clearly marked on the label. On the other hand, even for those patients who do shake the product, it is normally not possible to determine whether the shaking is adequate in intensity and/or duration to render the product uniform.
  • the ophthalmic gel compositions and ophthalmic ointment compositions described herein are “no-shake” formulations that maintained the dose-to-dose uniformity described herein.
  • drop bottles or tubes containing the ophthalmic aqueous compositions, the ophthalmic gel compositions, or ophthalmic ointment compositions are stored upright for a minimum of 12 hours prior to the start of the test.
  • predetermined number of drops or strips are dispensed from each commercial bottles or tubes at predetermined time intervals for an extended period of time or until no product was left in the bottle or tube. All drops and strips are dispensed into tared glass vials, capped, and stored at room temperature until analysis.
  • a milling process is used to reduce the size of a solid material to form particles in the micrometer to nanometer size range.
  • Dry and wet milling processes such as jet milling, cryo-milling, ball milling, media milling, and homogenization are known and can be used in methods described herein.
  • a suspension of the material to be used as the nanoparticle is mixed with milling media with or without excipients to reduce particle size.
  • Dry milling is a process wherein the material to be used as the nanoparticle is mixed with milling media with or without excipients to reduce particle size.
  • a suspension of the material to be used as the nanoparticle is mixed with milling media with or without excipients under cooled temperatures.
  • Any suitable grinding medium can be used for milling.
  • a ceramic and/or polymeric material and/or a metal can be used.
  • suitable materials may include zirconium oxide, silicon carbide, silicon oxide, silicon nitride, zirconium silicate, yttrium oxide, glass, alumina, alpha-alumina, aluminum oxide, polystyrene, poly (methyl methacrylate) , titanium, steel.
  • a grinding medium may have any suitable size.
  • the grinding medium may have an average diameter of at least about 0.1 mm, at least about 0.2 mm, at least about 0.5 mm, at least about 0.8 mm, at least about 1 mm, at least about 2 mm, or at least about 5 mm. In some cases, the grinding medium may have an average diameter of less than or equal to about 5 mm, less than or equal to about 2 mm, less than or equal to about 1 mm, less than or equal to about 0.8, less than or equal to about 0.5 mm, or less than or equal to about 0.2 mm. Combinations of the above-referenced ranges are also possible (e.g., an average diameter of at least about 0.5 millimeters and less than or equal to about 1 mm) . Other ranges are also possible.
  • Any suitable solvent may be used for milling.
  • the choice of solvent may depend on factors such as the solid material being milled, the particular type of stabilizer/mucus penetrating agent being used (e.g., one that may render the particle mucus penetrating) , the grinding material be used, among other factors.
  • Suitable solvents may be ones that do not substantially dissolve the solid material or the grinding material, but dissolve the stabilizer/mucus penetrating agent to a suitable degree.
  • Non-limiting examples of solvents may include water, buffered solutions, other aqueous solutions, alcohols (e.g., ethanol, methanol, butanol) , and mixtures thereof that may optionally include other components such as pharmaceutical excipients, polymers, pharmaceutical agents, salts, preservative agents, viscosity modifiers, tonicity modifier, taste masking agents, antioxidants, pH modifier, and other pharmaceutical excipients.
  • an organic solvent can be used.
  • a pharmaceutical agent may have any suitable solubility in these or other solvents, such as solubility in one or more of the ranges described above for aqueous solubility or for solubility in a coating solution.
  • the ophthalmically acceptable viscosity agent includes hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carboxymethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, sodium chondroitin sulfate, sodium hyaluronate.
  • viscosity enhancing agents compatible with the targeted ocular site include, but are not limited to, acacia (gum arabic) , agar, aluminum magnesium silicate, sodium alginate, sodium stearate, bladderwrack, bentonite, carbomer, carrageenan, Carbopol, xanthan, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose (MCC) , ceratonia, chitin, carboxymethylated chitosan, chondrus, dextrose, furcellaran, gelatin, Ghatti gum, guar gum, hectorite, lactose, sucrose, maltodextrin, mannitol, sorbitol, honey, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, sterculia gum, xanthum gum, gum tragacanth, ethyl cellulose, ethylhydroxyethyl cellulose, ethylmethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose,
  • the viscosity-enhancing excipient is a combination of MCC and CMC.
  • the viscosity-enhancing agent is a combination of carboxymethylated chitosan, or chitin, and alginate.
  • the combination of chitin and alginate with the ophthalmic agents disclosed herein acts as a controlled release formulation, restricting the diffusion of the ophthalmic agents from the formulation.
  • the combination of carboxymethylated chitosan and alginate is optionally used to assist in increasing the permeability of the ophthalmic agents in the eye.
  • an enhanced viscosity formulation comprising from about 0.1 mM and about 100 mM of an ophthalmic agent, a pharmaceutically acceptable viscosity agent, and water for injection, the concentration of the viscosity agent in the water being sufficient to provide a enhanced viscosity formulation with a final viscosity from about 100 to about 100,000 cP.
  • the viscosity of the gel is in the range from about 100 to about 50,000 cP, about 100 cP to about 1,000 cP, about 500 cP to about 1500 cP, about 1000 cP to about 3000 cP, about 2000 cP to about 8,000 cP, about 4,000 cP to about 50,000 cP, about 10,000 cP to about 500,000 cP, about 15,000 cP to about 1,000,000 cP.
  • the biocompatible gel when an even more viscous medium is desired, comprises at least about 35%, at least about 45%, at least about 55%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, or even at least about 80%or so by weight of the ophthalmic agent.
  • the biocompatible enhanced viscosity formulation comprises at least about 25%, at least about 35%, at least about 45%, at least about 55%, at least about 65%, at least about 75%, at least about 85%, at least about 90%or at least about 95%or more by weight of the ophthalmic agent.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable enhanced viscosity ophthalmically acceptable formulation comprises at least one ophthalmic agent and at least one gelling agent.
  • Suitable gelling agents for use in preparation of the formulation include, but are not limited to, celluloses, cellulose derivatives, cellulose ethers (e.g., carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, methylcellulose) , guar gum, xanthan gum, locust bean gum, alginates (e.g., alginic acid) , silicates, starch, tragacanth, carboxyvinyl polymers, carrageenan, paraffin, petrolatum and any combinations or mixtures thereof.
  • hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is utilized as the gelling agent.
  • the ophthalmic composition comprises one or more gelling agents.
  • the geling agent includes, but is not limited to, poloxamer (e.g. Poloxamer 407) , tetronics, ethyl (hydroxyethyl) cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP) , carbopol (e.g. Carbopol 1342P NF, Carbopol 980 NF) , alginates (e.g. low acetyl gellan gum ) , gellan, hyaluronic acid, pluronics (e.g.
  • poloxamer e.g. Poloxamer 407
  • tetronics ethyl (hydroxyethyl) cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP)
  • carbopol e.g. Carbopol 1342P NF, Carbopol 980 NF
  • alginates e.g. low acetyl gellan gum
  • gellan hyal
  • Pluronic F-127) chitosan, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) , polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) , dextran, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) , hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC) , methylcellulose (MC) , thiolated xyloglucan, polymethacrilic acid (PMMA) , polyethylene glycol (PEG) , pseudolatexes, xyloglucans, or combinations thereof.
  • PVA polyvinyl alcohol
  • PVP polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • HPMC hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose
  • HEC hydroxyethylcellulose
  • MC methylcellulose
  • PMMA polymethacrilic acid
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • pseudolatexes xyloglucans, or combinations thereof.
  • the viscosity-enhancing agent is a cellulose-based polymer selected from cellulose gum, alkylcellulose, hydroxyl-alkyl cellulose, hydroxyl-alkyl alkylcellulose, carboxy-alkyl cellulose, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing agent is hydroxyl-alkyl alkylcellulose. In some embodiment, the viscosity-enhancing agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose.
  • Typical ophthalmic formulations are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops.
  • a single administration (i.e., a single dose) of an ophthalmic formulation may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient.
  • one dose of the ophthalmic formulation described herein is three drop sszof the composition from the eye drop bottle.
  • ophthalmic compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
  • described herein include ophthalmic ointment compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another.
  • the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
  • the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 50%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 40%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 30%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 20%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 10%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 5%.
  • the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 10 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 8 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 5 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 3 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 2 consecutive doses.
  • a nonsettling formulation should not require shaking to disperse drug uniformly.
  • a “no-shake” formulation is potentially advantageous over formulations that require shaking for the simple reason that patients’ shaking behavior is a major source of variability in the amount of drug dosed. It has been reported that patients often times do not or forget to shake their ophthalmic compositions that requires shaking before administering a dose, despite the instructions to shake that were clearly marked on the label. On the other hand, even for those patients who do shake the product, it is normally not possible to determine whether the shaking is adequate in intensity and/or duration to render the product uniform.
  • the ophthalmic compositions described herein are “no-shake” formulations that maintained the dose-to-dose uniformity described herein.
  • drop bottles or tubes containing the ophthalmic compositions are stored upright for a minimum of 12 hours prior to the start of the test.
  • predetermined number of drops or strips are dispensed from each commercial bottles or tubes at predetermined time intervals for an extended period of time or until no product was left in the bottle or tube. All drops and strips are dispensed into tared glass vials, capped, and stored at room temperature until analysis.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
  • the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
  • the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
  • the ophthalmic disorder or disease affects function, clarity, and/or structure of the lens of the eye.
  • the ophthalmic disorder or disease is wet macular degeneration, cataracts, presbyopia, nuclear sclerosis of the eye lens, Refsum disease, Smith-Lemli-Opitz syndrome (SLOS) , Schnyder crystalline corneal dystrophy (SCCD) , abetalipoproteinemia, familial hypobetalipoproteinemia, neovascularization, or cancer.
  • the neovascularization is corneal neovascularization, iris neovascularization, or choroidal neovascularization.
  • the ophthalmic disorder or disease is corneal neovascularization.
  • the subject has undergone a surgical procedure for treatment of the ophthalmic disorder or disease.
  • about 0.005 mg/mLto about 5.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
  • about 0.01 mg/mL to about 4.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
  • the composition is administered the subject once per day, twice per day, three times per day, or four times per day.
  • the composition is administered the subject three times per day. In some embodiments, about 60 ⁇ L of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
  • the composition is administered the subject three times per day. In some embodiments, the composition is administered the subject four times per day.
  • the administration is topical or by ophthalmic injection.
  • the ophthalmic injection is an intravitreous or subconjunctival injection.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject daily. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject once per day, twice per day, three times per day, or four times per day. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject once per day. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject three times per day.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of up to about 12 weeks. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of at least one week. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of at least two weeks. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of up to about 2 weeks. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of one week, two weeks, 6 weeks, 12 weeks, 24 weeks, 48 weeks, or 52 weeks.
  • the ophthalmic aqueous formulations described herein are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops.
  • a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic aqueous formulation may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient.
  • the ophthalmic gel formulations described herein are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops.
  • a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic gel may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient.
  • the ophthalmic ointment formulations described herein are packaged in tubes or other squeezable containers with a dispensing nozzle through which strips of the ointment are delivered.
  • a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic ointment may include a single strip, or multiple strips into the eyes of the patient.
  • one dose of the ophthalmic aqueous formulation described herein is one drop of the aqueous composition from the eye drop bottle.
  • one dose of the ophthalmic gel described herein is one drop of the gel composition from the eye drop bottle.
  • one dose of the ophthalmic ointment is one strip of the ointment composition dispensed through the nozzle of a dispersing tube.
  • the ophthalmic aqueous formulations are administered as follows The lower lid of the eye to be administered was pulled down and a predetermined amount of the aqueous formulation (e.g. 1-3 drops) is applied to the inside of the eyelid.
  • a predetermined amount of the aqueous formulation e.g. 1-3 drops
  • the ophthalmic tip of the dispensing mechanism does not touch any surface to avoid contamination and/or injury.
  • the ophthalmic gel formulations are administered as follows The lower lid of the eye to be administered was pulled down and a predetermined amount of gel (e.g. 1-3 drops) is applied to the inside of the eyelid.
  • a predetermined amount of gel e.g. 1-3 drops
  • the ophthalmic tip of the dispensing mechanism does not touch any surface to avoid contamination and/or injury.
  • the ophthalmic ointment formulations are administered as follows The lower lid of the eye to be administered was pulled down and a small amount of ointment (approximately 0.25 inches) was applied to the inside of the eyelid. The ophthalmic tip of the dispensing mechanism does not touch any surface to avoid contamination and/or injury.
  • the ophthalmic composition is administered at predetermined time intervals over an extended period of time. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition is administered three times every day (i.e., three or four doses) . In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition is administered over 1 week, 2 weeks, 1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 6 moths, 1 year, 2 years, 3 years, 4 years, 5 years, 6 years, 7 years, 8 years, 9 years, 10 years, 11 years, or 12-15 years.
  • the ophthalmic composition is administered in doses having a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 20%, less than 10%, or less than 5%.
  • a composition disclosed herein is administered once to an individual in need thereof with a mild acute condition. In some embodiments, a composition disclosed herein is administered more than once to an individual in need thereof with a moderate or severe acute condition.
  • the administration of an ophthalmic agent may be administered chronically, that is, for an extended period of time, including throughout the duration of the patient’s life in order to ameliorate or otherwise control or limit the symptoms of the patient’s disease or condition.
  • the administration of the ophthalmic agent may be administered chronically, that is, for an extended period of time, including throughout the duration of the patient’s life in order to ameliorate or otherwise control or limit the symptoms of the patient’s disease or condition.
  • the administration of the ophthalmic agent may be given continuously; alternatively, the dose of drug being administered may be temporarily reduced or temporarily suspended for a certain length of time (i.e., a “drug holiday” ) .
  • the length of the drug holiday varies between 2 days and 1 year, including by way of example only, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 7 days, 10 days, 12 days, 15 days, 20 days, 28 days, 35 days, 50 days, 70 days, 100 days, 120 days, 150 days, 180 days, 200 days, 250 days, 280 days, 300 days, 320 days, 350 days, and 365 days.
  • the dose reduction during a drug holiday may be from 10%-100%, including by way of example only 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, and 100%.
  • a maintenance ophthalmic agent dose is administered if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or the frequency of administration, or both, is optionally reduced, as a function of the symptoms, to a level at which the improved disease, disorder or condition is retained. In certain embodiments, patients require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of symptoms.
  • the amount of ophthalmic agent that will correspond to such an amount will vary depending upon factors such as the particular compound, disease condition and its severity, according to the particular circumstances surrounding the case, including, e.g., the specific ophthalmic agent being administered, the route of administration, the condition being treated, the target area being treated, and the subject or host being treated.
  • the desired dose is presented in a single dose or as divided doses administered simultaneously (or over a short period of time) or at appropriate intervals.
  • the initial administration is a particular ophthalmic agent and the subsequent administration a different formulation or ophthalmic agent.
  • Sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate NaH 2 PO 4 ⁇ 2H 2 O
  • di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate Na 2 HPO 4 ⁇ 12H 2 O
  • Wetting agents include cationic surfactant or anionic surfactant
  • suspending agents include HPMC.
  • preparations containing finely divided drug particles (the suspensoid) distributed somewhat unformly throughout a vehicle in which the drug exhibits a minimum degree of solubility.
  • a suspension is the state of a drug when its particles are mixed with but undissolved in a fluid or solid.
  • Polyoxyl 15-Hydroxystearate is a new kind of excipient with high solubilization ability and low histamine release, low hemolytic activity and excellent physiological tolerance, which is approved for injection. Its safety is support by listed products and clinical research data.
  • Hypromellose (HPMC E4M) is widely used as polymer suspending agent for suspension formulation.
  • Other commercial grade products with different viscosities and different degrees of substitution may also be used.
  • Sodium thiosulfate as an antioxidant the aqueous solution is neutral or slightly alkaline, precipitation when meeting acid, suitable for alkaline drugs.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein are administered administered for about 1 day, about 2 days, about 3 days, about 4 days, about 5 days, about 6 days, about 7 days, about 8 days, about 9 days, about 10 days, about 11 days, about 12 days, about 13 days, about 14 days, about 15 days, about 16 days, about 17 days, about 18 days, about 19 days, about 20 days, about 21 days, about 22 days, about 23 days, about 24 days, about 25 days, about 26 days, about 27 days, about 28 days, about 29 days, or about 30 days.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein are administered administered daily, every other day, every other day 3 times a week, every 2 weeks, every 3 weeks, every 4 weeks, every 5 weeks, every 3 days, every 4 days, every 5 days, every 6 days, weekly, bi-weekly, 3 times a week, 4 times a week, 5 times a week, 6 times a week, once a month, twice a month, 3 times a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 5 months, or once every 6 months.
  • the method for the administration of multiple compounds comprises administering compounds within 48 hours or less of each other.
  • administration occurs within 24 hours, 16 hours, 12 hours, 11 hours, 10 hours, 9 hours, 8 hours, 7 hours, 6 hours, 5 hours, 4 hours, 3 hours, 2 hours, 1 hour, 30 minutes, 20 minutes, 15 minutes, or 10 minutes.
  • the compounds are administered simultaneously.
  • Angiogenesis is a process of sprouting into a new vessel from an existing vessel. This process is associated with the migration and proliferation of vascular endothelial cell. Angiogenesis is relative to many serious human diseases, such as malignant tumor. So far, it was found that ocular angiogenesis diseases comprise age-related macular degeneration (AMD) , diabetic retinopathy, neovascular glaucoma, and so on. The common characteristic of these diseases lies in the abnormal proliferation of ocular angiogenesis (Xiao Jin, et al., “Research Progress on the Clinical Application and Basic Mechanism of Anti-VEGF Drug, ” CHINA FOREIGN MEDICAL TREATMENT, 2012) .
  • AMD age-related macular degeneration
  • neovascular glaucoma neovascular glaucoma
  • Angiogenesis and neovascularization are both regulated by a mixture of stimulators and inhibitors that are balanced to ensure the proper construction of blood vessels in the body. Mis-regulated angiogenesis or neovascularization is the underlying cause of numerous diseases and conditions. Inhibition of angiogenesis or neovascularization can be a useful therapy for diseases such as macular degeneration, diabetic nephropathy, rheumatoid arthritis, atherosclerotic plaques, endometriosis, Crohn's disease, uterine fibroids, benign prostatic hyperplasia, psoriasis, corneal neovascularization, iris neovascularization, choroidal neovascularization and cancer.
  • diseases such as macular degeneration, diabetic nephropathy, rheumatoid arthritis, atherosclerotic plaques, endometriosis, Crohn's disease, uterine fibroids, benign prostatic hyperplasia, psorias
  • fibroblast growth factors aFGF, bFGF
  • TGF ⁇ , TGF ⁇ transforming growth factors alpha and beta
  • PDGF platelet-derived growth factor
  • IL-8 interleukin-8
  • VEGF vascular endothelial growth factor
  • angiogenesis Other stimulators implicated in angiogenesis include angiopoietin-1, Del-1, follistatin, granulocyte colony-stimulating factor (G-CSF) , hepatocyte growth factor (HGF) , leptin, midkine, placental growth factor, pleiotrophin (PTN) , progranulin, proliferin, and tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-alpha) .
  • G-CSF granulocyte colony-stimulating factor
  • HGF hepatocyte growth factor
  • PTNF-alpha tumor necrosis factor-alpha
  • control of angiogenesis is further mediated by a number of negative regulators of angiogenesis produced by the body including angioarrestin, ngiostatin (plasminogen fragment) , antiangiogenic antithrombin III, cartilage-derived inhibitor (GDI) , CD59 complement fragment, endostatin (collagen XVIII fragment) , fibronectin fragment, gro-beta, heparinases, heparin hexasaccharide fragment, human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG) , interferon alpha/beta/gamma, interferon inducible protein (IP-10) , interleukin-12, kringle 5 (plasminogen fragment) , metalloproteinase inhibitors (TIMPs) , 2-methoxyestradiol, placental ribonuclease inhibitor, plasminogen activator inhibitor, platelet factor-4 (PF4) , prolactin 16kD fragment, proliferin-related protein
  • VEGF appears to play a key role as a positive regulator of the abnormal angiogenesis accompanying tumor growth (reviewed in Brown et al, (1996) Control of Angiogenesis (Goldberg and Rosen, eds. ) Birkhauser, Basel, and Thomas (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 603-606) .
  • the role of the PDGF-B member of the PDGF family of signaling molecules has been under investigation, since it appears to play a role in the formation, expansion and proper function of perivascular cells, sometimes referred to as mural cells, e.g., vascular smooth muscle, mesangial cells, and pericytes.
  • Vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 2 (VEGFR2) , also called kinase insert Domain receptor (KDR) , family members are receptor tyrosine kinases, e.g., VEGFR1, VEGFR2 and so on. These receptors play an important role in the growth and metastasis of malignant tumors as well as in the development process of diseases such as vascular proliferative diseases (e.g., macular degeneration and tumor) .
  • EGFR2/KDR/Flk-1 vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 2 is a transmembrane receptor tyrosine kinase that mediates the angiogenic effects of VEGF-A and VEGF-C.
  • VEGFR2 can associate with VEGFR1, and a soluble form of VEGFR2 can circulate in the serum.
  • Platelet-derived growth factor receptors (PDGF-R) family members are receptor tyrosine kinases, e.g., PDGFR ⁇ and PDGFR ⁇ , and colony-stimulating factor-1 receptor, stem cell growth factor receptor KIT, and so on. It was found that these kinases are closely associated with the occurrence and development of tumors.
  • the abnormal expression of PDGFR has been found in melanoma, meningeoma, neuroendocrine neoplasm, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer and pancreatic cancer.
  • the abnormal activation of KIT is a direct inducement of the occurrence and development of many tumors.
  • FGFR Fibroblast Growth Factor Receptor family members comprise FGFR1, FGFR2 and so on, which are closely associated with cancers.
  • SRC kinase family comprises proteins having tyrosine protein kinase activity.
  • SRC kinase family as an oncegene protein, is initially found in Rous Sarcoma Virus. It has been found that the inhibition of SRC has some treatment and improvement effect on cancers or other diseases.
  • p38 Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MAPK) Pathway is intracellular stress response signal pathway, which is closely associated with inflammatory response.
  • Macular degeneration is mainly divided into two types, dry and wet, wherein wet macular degeneration (AMD) is characterized by new vessel of choroid entering the retina and the subsequent pathological changes such as bleeding, exudation and edema.
  • AMD wet macular degeneration
  • Wet macular degeneration will cause a rapid loss of vision, which is more serious than dry macular degeneration.
  • VEGF antagonists the early laser-cauterizing hemostasis
  • the latter is replaced by photodynamic therapy soon due to the poor effect.
  • photodynamic therapy has an improved efficacy, it is still unsatisfactory.
  • VEGF antagonist-Lucentis which is a recombinant of human-derived VEGF subtype monoclonal antibody fragment, is developed and it could reduce angiogenesis.
  • This medicament is approved by U.S. FDA for treating wet macular degeneration in 2006, which has a good efficacy; and meanwhile, it was found that this anti-VEGF drug also has therapeutic effect on diabetic retinopathy and neovascular glaucoma.
  • Lucentis is an antibody drug with an extremely high price, it cannot popularize all over the world. Therefore, it is an intense competition focus in the current international pharmaceutical industry to develop small molecular angiogenesis inhibitor medicament having excellent efficacy and low price.
  • kits for treating a disease or disorder associated with the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis Such kits generally will comprise one or more of the ophthalmic compositions disclosed herein, and instructions for using the kit.
  • the disclosure also contemplates the use of one or more of the ophthalmic compositions, in the manufacture of medicaments for treating, abating, reducing, or ameliorating the symptoms of a disease, dysfunction, or disorder in a mammal, such as a human that has, is suspected of having, or at risk for developing a disease or disorder associated with the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis.
  • kits include a carrier, package, or container that is compartmentalized to receive one or more containers such as vials, tubes, and the like, each of the container (s) including one of the separate elements to be used in a method described herein.
  • Suitable containers include, for example, bottles, vials, syringes, and test tubes.
  • the containers are formed from a variety of materials such as glass or plastic.
  • the articles of manufacture provided herein contain packaging materials.
  • Packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical products are also presented herein. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,323,907, 5,052,558 and 5,033,252.
  • Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are not limited to, drop bottles, tubes, pumps, bags, vials, containers, syringes, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for a selected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment.
  • a wide array of ophthalmic compositions provided herein are contemplated as are a variety of treatments for any disease, disorder, or condition that would benefit by controlled release administration of an ophthalmic agent to the eye.
  • a kit includes one or more additional containers, each with one or more of various materials (such as rinses, wipes, and/or devices) desirable from a commercial and user standpoint for use of a formulation described herein.
  • Such materials also include labels listing contents and/or instructions for use and package inserts with instructions for use. A set of instructions is optionally included.
  • a label is on or associated with the container.
  • a label is on a container when letters, numbers or other characters forming the label are attached, molded or etched into the container itself; a label is associated with a container when it is present within a receptacle or carrier that also holds the container, e.g., as a package insert.
  • a label is used to indicate that the contents are to be used for a specific therapeutic application.
  • a label also indicates directions for use of the contents, such as in the methods described herein.
  • the ophthalmic compositions are presented in a dispenser device which contains one or more unit dosage forms containing a compound provided herein.
  • the dispenser device is accompanied by instructions for administration.
  • the dispenser is also accompanied with a notice associated with the container in form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use, or sale of pharmaceuticals, which notice is reflective of approval by the agency of the form of the drug for human or veterinary administration.
  • such notice for example, is the labeling approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for prescription drugs, or the approved product insert.
  • compositions containing a compound provided herein formulated in a compatible pharmaceutical carrier are also prepared, placed in an appropriate container, and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension, comprising:
  • a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration, comprising:
  • a suspension comprising particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is formed.
  • the sterilization is performed before the admixing. In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed after the admixing.
  • the sterilization is performed at a temperature of about 121 °C. In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed for a period of from about 20 to about 30 minutes.
  • Examples 1-5 summarize the development of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, which is indicated for the treatment of corneal neovascularization.
  • QTPP quality target product profile
  • Our investigation during pharmaceutical development focused on those CQAs that could be impacted by a realistic change to the drug product formulation or manufacturing process.
  • KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop these CQAs included appearance, particle size, viscosity, osmotic pressure, pH, assay, impurity, visible particles and sterile.
  • the drug substance used for our development and the pivotal batch manufacturing was sourced from Asymchem Life Science (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. (No.
  • excipient grade selection was based on experience or supplier recommendation, level of the key excipient was optimized.
  • this includes micronization, sterilization, filtration and mixing steps. Micronization, sterilization, filtration and mixing step were identified as critical process parameters (CPPs) and acceptable ranges were identified. During preparation, an acceptable range for assay and particle size was identified. Scale-up principles and plans were discussed for scaling up from lab to pilot scale ( ⁇ 50.0 kg common blend) . A ⁇ 50.0 kg cGMP exhibit batch was manufactured at pilot scale. The operating ranges for identified CPPs at commercial scale were proposed and will be qualified and continually verified during routine commercial manufacture. Finally, a control strategy that process parameters identified as potentially high risk variables was proposed. Our control strategy also includes in-process controls and finished product specifications. The process will be monitored during the lifecycle of the product and additional knowledge gained will be utilized to make adjustments to the control strategy as appropriate.
  • Table 2 summarizes the quality attributes of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop and indicates which attributes were classified as drug product critical quality attributes (CQAs) .
  • CQAs drug product critical quality attributes
  • particle size, sedimentation volume ratio, osmotic pressure, viscosity, pH, assay of sodium thiosulfate, content uniformity, assay and impurity are identified as the subset of CQAs that have the potential to be impacted by the formulation and/or process variables.
  • KDR2-2 is a poorly soluble drug with large particle sizes.
  • the drug substance should be micronized to meet the quality standards of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop.
  • the result of microscopic observation of KDR2-2 (Batch #CK0120554-02-03P-01-32-01) in 1% HS 15 is shown in FIG. 1, and the particle sizes of KDR2-2 (Batch #CK0120554-02-03P-01-32-01) in 1% HS 15 were measured by malvern and is presented in Table 4.
  • excipients used in KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop were selected based on the excipient compatibility s tudies and the intent to prepare a simple suspension eye drop formulation with acceptable physical/chemical characteristics while providing good manufacturability using our process.
  • a summary of the excipient-drug substance compatibility studies and the selection of each excipient grade are provided in this example.
  • the pilot samples (Batch #FNB190016-002) and blank excipient solution (Batch #FNB190016-003) were stored at 60 °C, 40 °C and illumination (4500Lx ⁇ 500Lx) for 5, 10, and 30 days.
  • Excipient-drug substance compatibility was assessed through the results of appearance, pH, viscosity, osmotic pressure, particle size, assay and impurity, which are summarized in Table 6.
  • Common excipients functioning as polymer suspending agent, solubilizer, pH adjuster, osmotic pressure regulator and antioxidant were evaluated in the excipient compatibility study.
  • HPMC E4M hypromellose
  • polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate HS 15
  • sodium dihydrogen phosphate dehydrate NaH 2 PO 4 ⁇ 2H 2 O
  • di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate Na 2 HPO 4 ⁇ 12H 2 O
  • sodium chloride and sodium thiosulfate were selected for the product development.
  • the selection of excipient grade and supplier was based on previous formulation experience and knowledge about excipients that have been used successfully in approved products manufactured. The level of excipients used in the formulation was studied in subsequent formulation development studies.
  • Hypromellose HPMC E4M
  • Hypromellose (HPMC E4M) is widely used as polymer suspending agent for Suspension Eye Drop.
  • the product name is METHOCEL TM .
  • Polyoxyl 15-Hydroxystearate is a new kind of excipient with high solubilization ability and low histamine release, low hemolytic activity and excellent physiological tolerance, which is approved for injection. Its safety is support by listed products and clinical research data.
  • Di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate Na 2 HPO 4 ⁇ 12H 2 O
  • Sodium chloride is widely used as osmotic pressure regulator, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
  • the dosage of excipients used in this product is lower than the IIG dosage of the ophthalmic preparation or the intravenous preparation provided by the FDA approved drug inactive ingredient database.
  • the formulation development started with several small R&D batches (FNB180076-048-01 to FNB180076-065-03) .
  • the amount of each excipient in the formula was adjusted and optimized in these batches to give our drug product acceptable physical characteristics. All of these adjustments led to prototype formulation FNB180076-065-03, which showed acceptable physical characteristics.
  • Some of the bench scale trials are listed in Table 9. Table 10 provides physical characterizations of the lead bench scale-formulation. The results suggested that the basic composition developed during bench scale trials can produce acceptable physical characteristics.
  • the formulation composition was finalized based on Formulation Development Studies.
  • the level of hypromellose (HPMC E4M) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate, sodium chloride and sodium thiosulfate were optimized.
  • the finalized formulation for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, is presented in Table 12.
  • the process parameters that can potentially impact the finished product quality attributes determine the quality attributes of the output material (intermediate) produced at this step.
  • Process parameters of the intermediate from this step in the manufacturing process will determine quality attributes of the next intermediate and, eventually, those of the finished drug product.
  • the API Micronization, API suspension sterilization process, hypromellose (HPMC E4M) preparation process, the blank solution filtration and the stirring /mixing process are CPPs of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, which were investigated and the product quality attributes were evaluated.
  • the drug particle size for suspension eye drops should be reduced to level ⁇ 10 ⁇ m in an attempt to avoid excessive lacrimation, the micronization process of drug substance was studied.
  • the micronization process parameters of the jet are: injection pressure is 5 bar; crushing pressure is 3 bar.
  • the particle size and distribution of the KDR2-2 API were measured before and after pulverization, to determine whether the API satisfies the formulation requirements after pulverization. The results are shown in FIGs. 4 and Table 13.
  • the purpose of the moist heat sterilization process is to ensure the API and product are sterile.
  • Three sterilization methods of API were investigated: moist heat sterilization with API, moist heat sterilization with API, 0.1% HS 15 and HPMC E4M, moist heat sterilization with API and 0.1% HS 15, the particle size of the product were evaluated and the results are shown in Table 14.
  • HPMC E4M is sterilized after dissolving, and added to the API suspension after cooling which is stirred and dispersed after sterilization with other excipients solution;
  • HPMC E4M is added to the API suspension after dissolving, which is stirred and dispersed after sterilization with other excipients solution;
  • HPMC E4M is mixed with other excipients solution and filtered by 0.65 ⁇ m and 0.2 ⁇ m membranes after dissolving, then added to the API suspension which is not dispersed after sterilization.
  • the particle size of the product was less than 10 ⁇ m, but the production line of Zhuhai ESSEX Bio-Pharmaceutical CO., Ltd. is only equipped with one sterilizable tank, so the process can't fit the workshop.
  • the HPMC E4M concentration of batch FNB180076-071-01 and FNB180076-088 is 0.45%, the blank solution was difficult to filtrate with viscosity 27.77 mPa ⁇ s of the product, so the HPMC E4M concentration is adjusted to 0.40%.
  • the particle size of the product was more than 10 ⁇ m, but the particle size did not change significantly after the scale is enlarged, and the blank solution could be smoothly filtered and sterilized.
  • the process (3) of HPMC E4M preparation process is applied for batch production.
  • Filtration is the process for removing microorganisms in liquid or gas by physical retention to achieve the quality requirements associated with sterile pharmaceuticals.
  • the effects of filtration on the product should be investigated by filter adsorption experiments and compatibility experiments. PES and PVDF were selected, the blank solution was sterilized by filtration through a 0.2 ⁇ m filter, and the adsorption of the antioxidant sodium thiosulfate and impurities were evaluated. The results are shown in Table 16.
  • the purpose of the stirring /mixing process is to obtain a suspension with uniform particle size.
  • the influence of the stirring time on the particle size of the product is mainly investigated. From the particle size results, the longer of stirring time, the smaller of the particle size obtain of the product.
  • the jet which has same mechanize with the one utilized during the drug substance particle size selection for product development studies was used for the pilot scale production.
  • the LOD of pilot batch and scale up batches will be controlled the same range with lab scale.
  • the particle size of API will be evaluated.
  • the flow rate of the filter element was tested before production.
  • the first filter is equipped with 0.65 ⁇ m polyethersulfone filter and the second filter is equipped with 0.2 ⁇ m polyethersulfone filter, then both are connected with initial tank, and vacuum tank.
  • the batching system was subjected to moist heat sterilization at a temperature of 121 °C for 30 minutes. After the sterilization is completed, the vacuum stirring tank was cooled to below 70 °C.
  • HPMC E4M was added to 60-70 °C water for injection, then stirred to a clear solution at room temperature and cooled to below 30 °C.
  • HS 15 was melted to a liquid state in a 40-50 °C water bath, and accurately weighed after stirring evenly, then added water for injection below 30 °C and stirred.
  • the KDR2-2 suspension was filled by BFS (Blowing Filling and Sealing) integration equipment.
  • the manufacturing equipment that will be used to manufacture of the proposed pilot batches is list in the table below.
  • the KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop 0.1%w/v is packed in the following container closure systems.
  • Thioglycolate fluid medium tryptic soy mash liquid medium, tryptic soy agar medium, pH 7.0 sterile sodium chloride-peptone buffer, 1%polysorbate 80 -pH 7.0 sterile chlorine Sodium-peptone buffer, 0.9%sterile sodium chloride solution, and so on.
  • HTY-601 type bacteria collection instrument KAPY330 type bacteria culture incubator, sterile filter membrane (pore diameter not more than 0.45 ⁇ m, diameter is 50 mm) and membrane filter, suction filter bottle, biochemical incubator and so on.
  • a KAPY330 triple colony incubator aspirate a membrane with a pH 7.0 sterile sodium chloride-peptone buffer at a speed of 150-200 rpm, then pump KDR2-2 solution into the incubator for filtration, 300 mL each time, need 2 times. After the washing, 100 mL of thioglycolate fluid medium was pumped into each of the two incubators. The other incubator was pumped with 100 mL of tryptic soy mash liquid medium.
  • the thioglycolate fluid medium is cultured at 30 to 35 °C, and the pancreatic soy meal liquid medium is cultured at 20 to 25 °C.
  • the culture of the collection culture incubator should be observed day by day, not less than 14 days.
  • the incubator should be observed day by day during the culture and recorded for bacterial growth. If it is clarified within the time of the culture inspection, or if it is turbid, but it is confirmed that there is no microbial growth, it is judged that the test KDR2-2 formulation meets the requirements. If the medium is turbid during the cultivation process, after 14 days of culture, the presence or absence of microbial growth cannot be judged from the appearance. The medium can be transferred to the same fresh medium for 3 days if the medium is turbid again, or it can be taken the original culture solution, smeared, stained, and examined microscopically to determine whether there are bacteria.
  • the positive control bacteria should grow well, and the negative control should not have bacteria growth. Otherwise, the experiment is invalid. If the KDR2-2 formulation medium is clarified, or although it is turbid, but confirmed to be aseptic growth, judge that the test product meets the requirements; the culture medium in any of the culture materials is turbid and confirms the growth of the bacteria, and the test sample is not It is in compliance with the regulations, unless it is sufficient to prove that the test results are invalid, that is, the growing microorganisms are not included in the test sample.
  • *ND indicates detected value less than 0.5 ⁇ g/L
  • the five antioxidants (3114, 1010, 330, 1076, 168) and 2-mercaptobenzothiazole (2-MBT) were not detected in the packaging materials and preparations.
  • Contents of the lubricant methyl palmitate and methyl stearate in the packaging materials were 40.7 ⁇ g/g and 13.8 ⁇ g/g, respectively, were not detected in the preparations.
  • the contents of the volatiles DBB, DBP, and DBHBA in the packaging materials were 0.08 ⁇ g/g, 5.89 ⁇ g/g, and 0.09 ⁇ g/g, respectively, were not detected in the preparation.
  • the content of inorganic elements in the packaging material meets the requirements of the European Pharmacopoeia. Therefore, the selected single-dose eye drop bottle has good compatibility with the preparation and can be used as an inner package of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop.
  • the control strategy is the combination input material controls, process controls and monitoring, design spaces around individual or multiple unit operations, and final product specifications used to ensure consistent quality.
  • the control strategy for the proposed pilot scale process is listed in table below. In this table, the different elements of the control strategy are indicated in the third column. Operating ranges for the critical process parameters are contingent on scale up and validation. Specification and in-process controls are regulatory commitments for the proposed commercial process.
  • KDR2-2 API The particle size of KDR2-2 API will be controlled by the pressure of injection and crushing.
  • the control strategy for batching system sterilization is to maintain the sterilization temperature and time.
  • the control strategy for HPMC E4M preparation is control the temperature of WFI when the HPMC E4M is added.
  • the control strategy for HS 15 solution preparation is to keep the temperature when the HS 15 is melting.
  • the temperature of WFI should be controlled to avoid the formation of micelle.
  • the control strategy for API Suspension Sterilization is to maintain the sterilization temperature, sterilization time and the temperature after sterilization.
  • the time of blank solution filtration will be controlled by the pressure filtration.
  • the time of filling will be controlled by the filling volume.
  • Example 6 Study of the stability of KDR2-2 suspension using sodium sulfite or sodium thiosulfate as antioxidant.
  • HS 15 was melted to a liquid state in a 40-50 °C water bath, and accurately weighed after stirring evenly, then added water and phosphate bufferfor, osmotic pressure regulator and antioxidant, then filter for sterilization by 0.22 ⁇ m membrane.
  • the drug substance should be micronized to meet the quality standards of KDR2-2 suspension formulation.
  • hypromellose HPMC E4M
  • polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate HS 15
  • sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate NaH 2 PO 4 ⁇ 2H 2 O
  • di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate NaH 2 PO 4 ⁇ 12H 2 O
  • sodium chloride and sodium thiosulfate were selected for the product development.
  • the selection of excipient grade and supplier was based on previous formulation experience and knowledge about excipients that have been used successfully in approved products manufactured. The level of excipients used in the formulation was studied in subsequent formulation development studies.
  • the drug particle size for suspension eye drops should be reduced to level ⁇ 10 ⁇ m in an attempt to avoid excessive lacrimation, the micronization process of drug substance was studied.
  • Certain amount of KDR2-2 API was taken and fed into a jet mill.
  • the micronization process parameters of the jet are: injection pressure is 5 bar; crushing pressure is 3 bar; the media for micronization is air.
  • the particle size and distribution of the KDR2-2 API was measured before and after pulverization using the dry method (Mastersizer 3000, Malvern) , to determine whether the API satisfies the formulation requirements after pulverization. The results are as follows and in FIG. 4:
  • API content was determined by liquid chromatography, plus-C18 column (4.6 ⁇ 150 mm, 5 ⁇ m) , mobile phase: acetonitrile (with 0.2 ⁇ trifluoroacetic acid) : water (with 0.2 ⁇ trifluoroacetic acid) , acetonitrile gradient 5-95%, time: 17 min, column temeperature 20°C, detection wavelength 254 nm.
  • FIGS. 5A-5B The results are shown as follows and in FIGS. 5A-5B:
  • Impurity 1 and Impurity 2 correspond to Intermediate A and Intermediate B as shown in Scheme 1 of Example 8.
  • Hypromellose Preparation Process Development Screening of suspending agents, using suitable medicinal polymer excipients as suspending agents
  • Sodium Dihydrogen Phosphate Dihydrate (NaH 2 PO 4 ⁇ 2H 2 O) : it is widely used as pH adjuster, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
  • Di-Sodium Hydrogen Phosphate Dodecahydrate (Na 2 HPO 4 ⁇ 12H 2 O) : it is widely used as pH adjuster, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
  • sodium chloride is widely used as osmotic pressure regulator, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
  • KDR2-2 drug substance was micronized, added into a brown vial and sealed and subsequently sterilized by steam sterilization at 121 °C for 30 minutes.
  • dispersion medium solution (excipient solution) was prepared as prescribed, excipient solution by filtration through a 0.2 ⁇ m polyethersulfone (PES) microporous filter, then After the sterilization was completed, mix the KDR2-2 drug substance and the dispersion medium solution (excipient solution) under sterile conditions.
  • PES polyethersulfone
  • KDR2-2 drug substance was micronized, add all of the excipient substance except the HS 15 into a brown vial (total quality solution is 50 g) and sealed and subsequently sterilized by steam sterilization at 121°C for 30 minutes, add the HS 15 which is by filtration through a 0.2 ⁇ m polyethersulfone.
  • KDR2-2 drug substance was micronized, HS 15 was prepared as prescribed (dissolve in water, total quality is 50 g) , add them into a beaker. After by stirring, add the remaining prescription ingredients and sealed, sterilized by steam sterilization at 121 °C for 20 minutes.
  • HPMC was added into 60-70 °C water (WFI) 1L for swelling, then stirring to a clear solution at room temperature add more 2L WFI.
  • HPMC was added into 60-70 °C water (WFI) 1L for swelling, then stirring to a clear solution at room temperature add more 2L WFI, marked as solution A.
  • HPMC was added into 60-70 °C water (WFI) 1L for swelling, then stirring to a clear solution at room temperature add more 2L WFI, marked as solution A.
  • osmotic pressure values of from about 200 to about 500 mOsmol/kg (with approximately 300 mOsmol/kg as an optimal value. )
  • 300 ⁇ l RD171207 formulation add 300 ⁇ L 1*PBS, total volume is 600 ⁇ L, the value of osmotic is 350 mOsmol/kg, pH value is 7.65; and 400 ⁇ L RD171207 formulation add 200 ⁇ L ddH 2 O, the value of osmotic is 560 mOsmol/kg, the pH value is 7.77.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Dispersion Chemistry (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)

Abstract

A pharmaceutical composition for ophthalmic dosing or administration is disclosed, comprising (i) a compound of Formula (I) or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and (ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. The pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension. The composition may be used to treat ophthalmic disorders and diseases caused by abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis.

Description

A FORMULATION FOR TREATING OPHTHALMIC CONDITIONS BACKGROUND
Angiogenesis and neovascularization are the formation or growth of new or existing capillaries or blood vessels, which may have importance in disease and health. Pathologic ocular angiogenesis or neovascularization can occur in retina, choroid, and cornea resulting in severe visual impairment. It is related to a broad spectrum of disorders including wet age-related macular degeneration (AMD) , diabetic retinopathy, retinal artery or vein occlusion, retinopathy of prematurity (ROP) , neovascular glaucoma, and corneal neovascularization secondary to infectious or inflammatory processes.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE DISCLOSURE
In an aspect, provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition, comprising:
(i) a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000001
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration.
In some embodiments, the dosage form is a suspension comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
In an aspect, provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition, comprising:
(i) fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000002
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension, gel, or ointment.
In some embodiments, the particles are micronized.
In some embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 10 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.3 μm to about 5 μm.
In some embodiments, at least about 10%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 20%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 30%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 40%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 50%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 60%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 70%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 80%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm In some embodiments, at least about 90%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 95%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 0.5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1.5 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 2.5 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 7.5 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 10 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 15 μm.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; is crystalline, microcrystalline, amorphous, or lyophilized.
In some embodiments, the dosage form is a modified-release dosage form.
In some embodiments, the modified-release dosage form is a delayed-release dosage form, an extended-release (ER) dosage form, or a targeted-release dosage form.
In some embodiments, the ER dosage form is a sustained-release (SR) dosage form or controlled-release (CR) dosage form.
In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.025%to about 2.0%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.5%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.15%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
In some embodiments, the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a diluent, buffering agent, suspending agent, solubilizer, emulsifier, antioxidant, pH adjusting agent, preservative, detackifier, anti-foaming agent, chelating agent, thickening agent, viscomodulator, tonicifier, colorant, opacifier, binder, filler, plasticizer, or any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a suspending agent, a wetting agent, a pH adjuster, an anti-oxidant, an osmotic pressure regulator, or any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the suspending agent is a polymer.
In some embodiments, the suspending agent is a carbomer homopolymer, carbomer copolymer, carbomer interpolymer, polycarbophil, a cellulose derivative, a polyvinyl alcohol, a povidone, a hyaluronic acid or a salt thereof, chondroitin sulfate, a natural gum, or any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the cellulose derivative is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, or any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) is K100, K4M, K15M, K100M, E4M, E10M, or any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the suspending agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) .
In some embodiments, the hypromellose is HPMC E4M.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the suspending agent in the compositions is up to about 1%w/w.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the suspending agent in the formulation is up to about 0.5%w/w.
In some embodiments, the solubilizer is 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000003
ELP, 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000004
HS 15, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the solubilizer is 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000005
HS 15.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the solubilizer in the composition is up to about 5%w/w.
In some embodiments, the wetting agent is polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate.
In some embodiments, the pH adjuster is a buffer. In some embodiments, the buffer is selected from borates, borate-polyol complexes, phosphate buffering agents, citrate buffering agents, acetate buffering agents, carbonate buffering agents, organic buffering agents, amino acid buffering agents, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the buffer is a phosphate buffer or a hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the phosphate buffer is potassium phosphate or a hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the phosphate buffer is sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate (NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O) , or a combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the osmotic pressure regulator is a salt.
In some embodiments, the salt is sodium chloride.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the osmotic pressure regulator in the composition is up to about 0.5%w/w.
In some embodiments, the anti-oxidant is a thiosulfate.
In some embodiments, the thiosulfate is sodium thiosulfate.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the anti-oxidant in the composition is up to about 0.2%w/w.
In some embodiments, the composition is stable for up to 24 months at a temperature of from about 20 ℃ to about 25 ℃.
In some embodiments, the composition is substantially free of impurities.
In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 90%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 95%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 96%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 97%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 98%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 99%by weight pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 99.1%, about 99.2%, about 99.3%, about 99.4%, about 99.5%, about 99.6%, about 99.7%, about 99.8%, about 99.9%, or about 100%by weight pure.
In some embodiments, the composition comprises up to about 2%w/w of total impurities.
In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than about 0.9%w/w, about 0.8%w/w, about 0.7%w/w, about 0.6%w/w, about 0.5%w/w, about 0.4%w/w, about 0.3%w/w, about 0.2%w/w, or about 0.1%w/w of total impurities.
In some embodiments, the impurity is a degradant.
In some embodiments, the impurity comprises the compound of Formula (II) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000006
In some embodiments, the composition comprises up to about 2.0%w/w of any individual impurity.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing a disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(i) a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000007
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration;
and wherein the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing a disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(i) fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000008
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient,
wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension; and wherein the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(i) a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000009
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(i) fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000010
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and 
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic disorder or disease affects function, clarity, and/or structure of the lens of the eye.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic disorder or disease is wet macular degeneration, cataracts, presbyopia, nuclear sclerosis of the eye lens, Refsum disease, Smith-Lemli-Opitz syndrome (SLOS) , Schnyder crystalline corneal dystrophy (SCCD) , abetalipoproteinemia, familial hypobetalipoproteinemia, neovascularization, or cancer.
In some embodiments, the neovascularization is corneal neovascularization, iris neovascularization, or choroidal neovascularization.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic disorder or disease is corneal neovascularization.
In some embodiments, the subject has undergone a surgical procedure for treatment of the ophthalmic disorder or disease.
In some embodiments, about 0.005 mg/mLto about 5.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject. In some embodiments, about 0.01 mg/mL to about 4.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
In some embodiments, the composition is administered the subject once per day, twice per day, three times per day, or four times per day.
In some embodiments, the composition is administered the subject three times per day. In some embodiments, about 60 μL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
In some embodiments, the administration is topical or by ophthalmic injection.. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic injection is an intravitreous or subconjunctival injection.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, comprising a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension, comprising:
(i) micronizing the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof;
(ii) sterilizing the micronized compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(iii) admixing a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof with the least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and at least one pharmaceutically  acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration, comprising:
(i) micronizing the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof;
(ii) sterilizing the micronized compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(iii) admixing a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof with the least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
In some embodiments, a suspension comprising particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is formed.
In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed before the admixing. In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed after the admixing.
In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed at a temperature of about 121 ℃. In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed for a period of from about 20 to about 30 minutes.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
All publications, patents, and patent applications mentioned in this specification are hereinincorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent, or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1. is a microscopic image of KDR2-2 API (100x magnification) , batch #CDK0120554-02-03P-01-32-01.
FIG. 2. is a microscopic image of KDR2-2 API after pulverization (400x magnification) , batch #CKo120554-02-03P-01-32-01.
FIG. 3. schematically depicts the manufacturing process for KDR2-2 Suspension EyeDrop, 0.1%w/v.
FIG. 4. is a graphic representation comparing the particle size distribution of KDR2-2 API before and after pulverization.
FIGS. 5A-5B. are chromatograms showing the purity of KDR2-2 API before and after pulverization.
FIGS. 6A-6E. are chromatograms depicting the increase in degradation of KDR2-2 formulation at 40 ℃ over a three month period.
FIG. 7. is a chromatogram depicting the purity of KDR2-2 formulation.
FIG. 8. Show the results of RBC cells hemolysis.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE DISCLOSURE
Provided herein are, for example, compositions for treating and/or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease. Also provided herein are, for example, methods of treating and/or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease.
I. Definitions
The abbreviations used herein have their conventional meaning within the chemical and biological arts. The chemical structures and formulae set forth herein are constructed according to the standard rules of chemical valency known in the chemical arts.
The term “tautomer, ” as used herein, refers to one of two or more structural isomers which exist in equilibrium and which are readily converted from one isomeric form to another.
It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that certain compounds of this invention may exist in tautomeric forms, all such tautomeric forms of the compounds being within the scope of the invention.
Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds which differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of a hydrogen by a deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by  13C-or  14C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention.
The compounds of the present invention may also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compounds. For example, the compounds may be radiolabeled with radioactive isotopes, such as for example tritium ( 3H) , iodine-125 ( 125I) , or carbon-14 ( 14C) . All isotopic variations of the compounds of the present invention, whether radioactive or not, are encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
The term “isotopic variant” refers to a compound that contains an unnatural proportion of an isotope at one or more of the atoms that constitute such a compound. In some embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of one or more isotopes,  including, but not limited to, hydrogen ( 1H) , deuterium ( 2H) , tritium ( 3H) , carbon-11 ( 11C) , carbon-12 ( 12C) , carbon-13 ( 13C) , carbon-14 ( 14C) , nitrogen-13 ( 13N) , nitrogen-14 ( 14N) , nitrogen-15 ( 15N) , oxygen-14 ( 14O) , oxygen-15 ( 15O) , oxygen-16 ( 16O) , oxygen-17 ( 17O) , oxygen-18 ( 18O) , fluorine-17 ( 17F) , fluorine-18 ( 18F) , phosphorus-31 ( 31P) , phosphorus-32 ( 32P) , phosphorus-33 ( 33P) , sulfur-32 ( 32S) , sulfur-33 ( 33S) , sulfur-34 ( 34S) , sulfur-35 ( 35S) , sulfur-36 ( 36S) , chlorine-35 ( 35Cl) , chlorine-36 ( 36Cl) , chlorine-37 ( 37Cl) , bromine-79 ( 79Br) , bromine-81 ( 81Br) , iodine-123 ( 123I) , iodine-125 ( 125I) , iodine-127 ( 127I) , iodine-129 ( 129I) , and iodine-131 ( 131I) . In some embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a compound is in a stable form, that is, non-radioactive. In some embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of one or more isotopes, including, but not limited to, hydrogen ( 1H) , deuterium ( 2H) , carbon-12 ( 12C) , carbon-13 ( 13C) , nitrogen-14 ( 14N) , nitrogen-15 ( 15N) , oxygen-16 ( 16O) , oxygen-17 ( 17O) , oxygen-18 ( 18O) , fluorine-17 ( 17F) , phosphorus-31 ( 31P) , sulfur-32 ( 32S) , sulfur-33 ( 33S) , sulfur-34 ( 34S) , sulfur-36 ( 36S) , chlorine-35 ( 35Cl) , chlorine-37 ( 37Cl) , bromine-79 ( 79Br) , bromine-81 ( 81Br) , and iodine-127 ( 127I) . In some embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a compound is in an unstable form, that is, radioactive. In some embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of one or more isotopes, including, but not limited to, tritium ( 3H) , carbon-11 ( 11C) , carbon-14 ( 14C) , nitrogen-13 ( 13N) , oxygen-14 ( 14O) , oxygen-15 ( 15O) , fluorine-18 ( 18F) , phosphorus-32 ( 32P) , phosphorus-33 ( 33P) , sulfur-35 ( 35S) , chlorine-36 ( 36Cl) , iodine-123 ( 123I) , iodine-125 ( 125I) , iodine-129 ( 129I) , and iodine-131 ( 131I) . It will be understood that, in a compound as provided herein, any hydrogen can be  2H, for example, or any carbon can be  13C, for example, or any nitrogen can be  15N, for example, or any oxygen can be  18O, for example, where feasible according to the judgment of one of skill. In some embodiments, an “isotopic variant” of a compound contains unnatural proportions of deuterium (D) .
It should be noted that throughout the application that alternatives are written in Markush groups, for example, each amino acid position that contains more than one possible amino acid. It is specifically contemplated that each member of the Markush group should be considered separately, thereby comprising another embodiment, and the Markush group is not to be read as a single unit.
The terms “a” or “an, ” as used in herein, mean one or more. In addition, the phrase “substituted with a [n] , ” as used herein, means the specified group may be substituted with one or more of any or all of the named substituents. For example, where a group, such as an alkyl or heteroaryl group, is “substituted with an unsubstituted C 1-C 20 alkyl, or unsubstituted 2 to 20  membered heteroalkyl, ” the group may contain one or more unsubstituted C 1-C 20 alkyls, and/or one or more unsubstituted 2 to 20 membered heteroalkyls.
The term “acceptable” with respect to a formulation, composition or ingredient, as used herein, means having no persistent detrimental effect on the general health of the subject being treated.
The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” as used hereinincludes both acid and base addition salts, i.e., including salts of the active compounds that are prepared with relatively nontoxic acids or bases, depending on the particular substituents found on the compounds described herein. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively acidic functionalities, base addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired base, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts include sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, organic amino, or magnesium salt, or a similar salt. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively basic functionalities, acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived from relatively nontoxic organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, maleic, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, lactic, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, oxalic, methanesulfonic, and the like. Also included are salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like (see, for example, Berge et al., “Pharmaceutical Salts, ” Journal of Pharmaceutical Science, 1977, 66, 1-19) . Certain specific compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts, or to exist as Zwitterions.
Thus, the compounds of the present invention may exist as salts, such as with pharmaceutically acceptable acids. The present invention includes such salts. Non-limiting examples of such salts include hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, phosphates, sulfates, methanesulfonates, nitrates, maleates, acetates, citrates, fumarates, proprionates, tartrates (e.g., (+) -tartrates, (-) -tartrates, or mixtures thereof including racemic mixtures) , succinates, benzoates,  and salts with amino acids such as glutamic acid, and quaternary ammonium salts (e.g., methyl iodide, ethyl iodide, and the like) . These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
The neutral forms of the compounds are preferably regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner. The parent form of the compound may differ from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents. In some embodiments, compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts. The neutral forms of the compounds may be regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in a conventional manner. The parent form of the compounds differs from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents, but, unless specifically indicated, the salts disclosed herein are equivalent to the parent form of the compound for the purposes of the present invention.
In addition to salt forms, the present invention provides compounds, which are in a prodrug form. Prodrugs of the compounds described herein are those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the present invention. Prodrugs of the compounds described herein may be converted in vivo after administration. Additionally, prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the present invention by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment, such as, for example, when contacted with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.
Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present invention and are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.
“Pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” and “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refer to a substance that aids the administration of a compound to and absorption by a subject and can be included in the compositions of the present invention without causing a significant adverse toxicological effect on the patient. Non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include water, NaCl, normal saline solutions, lactated Ringer’s, normal sucrose, normal glucose, binders, fillers, disintegrants, lubricants, coatings, sweeteners, flavors, salt  solutions (such as Ringer’s solution) , alcohols, oils, gelatins, carbohydrates such as lactose, amylose or starch, fatty acid esters, hydroxymethycellulose, polyvinyl pyrrolidine, and colors, and the like. Such preparations can be sterilized and, if desired, mixed with auxiliary agents such as lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure, buffers, coloring, and/or aromatic substances and the like that do not deleteriously react with the compounds of the invention. One of skill in the art will recognize that other pharmaceutical excipients are useful in the present invention.
The term “preparation” is intended to include the formulation of the active compound with encapsulating material as a carrier providing a capsule in which the active component with or without other carriers, is surrounded by a carrier, which is thus in association with it. Similarly, cachets and lozenges are included. Tablets, powders, capsules, pills, cachets, and lozenges can be used as solid dosage forms suitable for oral administration.
The terms “disease” or “condition” refer to a state of being or health status of a patient or subject capable of being treated with the compounds or methods provided herein. The disease may be an ophthalmic disease.
The terms “treating” or “treatment” refer to any indicia of success in therapy or amelioration of an injury, disease, pathology or condition, including any objective or subjective parameter such as abatement; remission; diminishing of symptoms or making the injury, pathology or condition more tolerable to the patient; slowing in the rate of degeneration or decline; making the final point of degeneration less debilitating; improving a patient’s physical or mental well-being. The treatment or amelioration of symptoms can be based on objective or subjective parameters; including the results of a physical examination, neuropsychiatric exams, and/or a psychiatric evaluation. The term “treating” and conjugations thereof may include prevention of an injury, pathology, condition, or disease. In some embodiments, treating is preventing. In other embodiments, treating does not include preventing.
“Treating, ” “treatment, ” “palliating, ” or “ameliorating” are used interchangeably herein. These terms as used herein (and as well-understood in the art) also broadly include any approach for obtaining beneficial or desired results in a subject’s condition, including clinical results. Beneficial or desired clinical results can include, but are not limited to, alleviation or amelioration of one or more symptoms or conditions, diminishment of the extent of a disease, stabilizing (i.e., not worsening) the state of disease, prevention of a disease’s transmission or spread, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state,  diminishment of the reoccurrence of disease, and remission, whether partial or total and whether detectable or undetectable. In other words, “treatment, ” as used herein, includes any cure, amelioration, or prevention of a disease. Treatment may prevent the disease from occurring; inhibit the disease’s spread; relieve the disease’s symptoms (e.g., itching, swelling, burning, cough, fever, chest pain, difficulty breathing) , fully or partially remove the disease’s underlying cause, shorten a disease’s duration, or do a combination of these things.
“Treating” and “treatment” as used herein include prophylactic treatment. Treatment methods include administering to a subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein. The administering step may consist of a single administration or may include a series of administrations. The length of the treatment period depends on a variety of factors, such as the severity of the condition, the age of the patient, the concentration of the compound, the activity of the compositions used in the treatment, or a combination thereof. It will also be appreciated that the effective dosage of an agent used for the treatment or prophylaxis may increase or decrease over the course of a particular treatment or prophylaxis regime. Changes in dosage may result and become apparent by standard diagnostic assays known in the art. In some instances, chronic administration may be required. For example, the compositions are administered to the subject in an amount and duration sufficient to treat the patient.
The terms “prevent, ” “preventing, ” and “prevention” refer to a decrease in the occurrence of disease symptoms in a patient. The preventing or prevention may be complete (no detectable symptoms) or partial, such that fewer symptoms are observed than would likely occur absent treatment. In some embodiments, prevent refers to slowing the progression of the disease, disorder or condition or inhibiting progression thereof to a harmful or otherwise undesired state.
The terms “patient” or “subject in need thereof” refer to a living organism suffering from or prone to a disease or condition that can be treated by administration of a pharmaceutical composition as provided herein. Non-limiting examples include humans, other mammals, bovines, rats, mice, dogs, monkeys, goat, sheep, cows, deer, and other non-mammalian animals including, but not limited to, fish and birds. In some embodiments, a patient is human.
Treatment, as referred to herein, also refers to the systemic delivery of the compounds disclosed herein to any type of plant, including trees, shrubs, flowering plants, foliage plants, house plants, groundcover and grass, and agronomic plants (including crops of agronomic plants) .
As used herein, “hydrates” are compounds that contain either stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amounts of water, and, in some embodiments, are formed during the process of crystallization with water.
As used herein, the term “agronomic plant” refers to a plant of which a part or all is, or has been, harvested or cultivated on a commercial scale, or serves as an important source of feed, food, fiber, or other chemical compounds.
An “effective amount” is an amount sufficient for a compound to accomplish a stated purpose relative to the absence of the compound (e.g., achieve the effect for which it is administered, treat a disease, reduce enzyme activity, increase enzyme activity, reduce a signaling pathway, or reduce one or more symptoms of a disease or condition) . An example of an “effective amount” is an amount sufficient to contribute to the treatment, prevention, or reduction of a symptom or symptoms of a disease, which could also be referred to as a “therapeutically effective amount. ” A “reduction” of a symptom or symptoms (and grammatical equivalents of this phrase) means decreasing of the severity or frequency of the symptom (s) , or elimination of the symptom (s) . A “prophylactically effective amount” of a drug is an amount of a drug that, when administered to a subject, will have the intended prophylactic effect, e.g., preventing or delaying the onset (or reoccurrence) of an injury, disease, pathology or condition, or reducing the likelihood of the onset (or reoccurrence) of an injury, disease, pathology, or condition, or their symptoms. The full prophylactic effect does not necessarily occur by administration of one dose, and may occur only after administration of a series of doses. Thus, a prophylactically effective amount may be administered in one or more administrations. An “activity decreasing amount, ” as used herein, refers to an amount of antagonist required to decrease the activity of an enzyme relative to the absence of the antagonist. A “function disrupting amount, ” as used herein, refers to the amount of antagonist required to disrupt the function of an enzyme or protein relative to the absence of the antagonist. The exact amounts will depend on the purpose of the treatment, and will be ascertainable by one skilled in the art using known techniques (see, e.g., Lieberman, Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms (vols. 1-3, 1992) ; Lloyd, The Art, Science and Technology of Pharmaceutical Compounding (1999) ; Pickar, Dosage Calculations (1999) ; and Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, 2003, Gennaro, Ed., Lippincott, Williams &Wilkins) . The therapeutically effective amount can be ascertained by measuring relevant physiological effects, and it can be adjusted in connection with the dosing regimen and diagnostic analysis of the subject’s condition, and the like. By way of example, measurement of  the serum level of a compound of Formula (I) or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof (or, e.g., a metabolite thereof) at a particular time post-administration may be indicative of whether a therapeutically effective amount has been administered.
For any compound described herein, therapeutically effective amount can be initially determined from cell culture assays. Target concentrations will be those concentrations of active compound (s) that are capable of achieving the methods described herein, as measured using the methods described herein or known in the art.
As is well known in the art, therapeutically effective amounts for use in humans can also be determined from animal models. For example, a dose for humans can be formulated to achieve a concentration that has been found to be effective in animals. The dosage in humans can be adjusted by monitoring compounds effectiveness and adjusting the dosage upwards or downwards, as described above. Adjusting the dose to achieve maximal efficacy in humans based on the methods described above and other methods is well within the capabilities of the ordinarily skilled artisan. Adjusting the dose to achieve maximal therapeutic window efficacy or toxicity in humans based on the methods described above and other methods is well within the capabilities of the ordinarily skilled artisan.
The term “therapeutically effective amount, ” as used herein, refers to that amount of therapeutic agent sufficient to ameliorate the disorder, as described above. For example, for the given parameter, a therapeutically effective amount will show an increase or decrease of at least 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 75%, 80%, 90%, or at least 100%. Therapeutic efficacy can also be expressed as “-fold” increase or decrease. For example, a therapeutically effective amount can have at least a 1.2-fold, 1.5-fold, 2-fold, 5-fold, or more effect over a control.
Dosages may be varied depending upon the requirements of the patient and the compound being employed. The dose administered to a patient, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to effect a beneficial therapeutic response in the patient over time. The size of the dose also will be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects. Determination of the proper dosage for a particular situation is within the skill of the practitioner. Generally, treatment is initiated with smaller dosages which are less than the optimum dose of the compound. Thereafter, the dosage is increased by small increments until the optimum effect under circumstances is reached. Dosage amounts and intervals can be adjusted  individually to provide levels of the administered compound effective for the particular clinical indication being treated. This will provide a therapeutic regimen that is commensurate with the severity of the individual’s disease state.
As used herein, the term “administering” means parenteral or enteral administration. Accordingly, as used herein, “administering” refers to administration including, but not limited to, oral administration, administration as a suppository, topical contact, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, inhalation, nebulization, intralesional, intrathecal, intracranial, intranasal, subcutaneous administration, or the implantation of a slow-release device, e.g., a mini-osmotic pump, to a subject. Administration is by any route, including transmucosal (e.g., buccal, sublingual, palatal, gingival, nasal, vaginal, rectal, or transdermal) . Parenteral administration includes, e.g., intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arteriole, intradermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intraventricular, and intracranial. Other modes of delivery include, but are not limited to, the use of liposomal formulations, intravenous infusion, transdermal patches, by ocular route, by otic route, etc. By “co-administer” it is meant that a composition described herein is administered at the same time, just prior to, or just after the administration of one or more additional therapies. The compound of the invention can be administered alone or can be co-administered to the patient. Co-administration is meant to include simultaneous, approximately simultaneous, or sequential administration of the compound individually or in combination (more than one compound or agent) . Thus, the preparations can also be combined, when desired, with other active substances (e.g., to reduce metabolic degradation) . The compositions of the present invention can be delivered by transdermally, by a topical route, formulated as applicator sticks, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, gels, creams, ointments, pastes, jellies, paints, powders, and aerosols. Oral preparations include tablets, pills, powder, dragees, capsules, liquids, lozenges, cachets, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, etc., suitable for ingestion by the patient. Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, pills, capsules, cachets, suppositories, and dispersible granules. Liquid form preparations include solutions, suspensions, and emulsions, for example, water or water/propylene glycol solutions. The compositions of the present invention may additionally include components to provide sustained release and/or comfort. Such components include high molecular weight, anionic mucomimetic polymers, gelling polysaccharides and finely-divided drug carrier substrates. These components are discussed in greater detail in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,911,920; 5,403,841; 5,212,162; and 4,861,760. The entire contents of these patents are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety for all  purposes. The compositions of the present invention can also be delivered as microspheres for slow release in the body. For example, microspheres can be administered via intradermal injection of drug-containing microspheres, which slowly release subcutaneously (see Rao, J. Biomater Sci. Polym. Ed. 7: 623-645, 1995; as biodegradable and injectable formulations (see, e.g., Gao Pharm. Res. 12: 857-863, 1995) ; or, as microspheres for oral administration (see, e.g., Eyles, J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 49: 669-674, 1997) . In another embodiment, the formulations of the compositions of the present invention can be delivered by the use of liposomes which fuse with the cellular membrane or are endocytosed, i.e., by employing receptor ligands attached to the liposome, that bind to surface membrane protein receptors of the cell resulting in endocytosis. By using liposomes, particularly where the liposome surface carries receptor ligands specific for target cells, or are otherwise preferentially directed to a specific organ, one can focus the delivery of the compositions of the present invention into the target cells in vivo. (See, e.g., Al-Muhammed, J. Microencapsul. 13: 293-306, 1996; Chonn, Curr. Opin. Biotechnol. 6: 698-708, 1995; Ostro, Am. J. Hosp. Pharm. 46: 1576-1587, 1989) . The compositions of the present invention can also be delivered as nanoparticles.
By “co-administer” it is meant that a composition described herein is administered at the same time, just prior to, or just after the administration of one or more additional therapies. The compounds of the invention can be administered alone or can be co-administered to the patient. Co-administration is meant to include simultaneous or sequential administration of the compounds individually or in combination (more than one compound) . The compositions of the present invention can be delivered transdermally, by a topical route, or formulated as applicator sticks, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, gels, creams, ointments, pastes, jellies, paints, powders, and aerosols.
For any compound described herein, therapeutically effective amount can be initially determined from cell culture assays. Target concentrations will be those concentrations of active compound (s) that are capable of achieving the methods described herein, as measured using the methods described herein or known in the art.
As is well known in the art, therapeutically effective amounts for use in humans can also be determined from animal models. For example, a dose for humans can be formulated to achieve a concentration that has been found to be effective in animals. The dosage in humans can be adjusted by monitoring compounds effectiveness and adjusting the dosage upwards or downwards, as described above. Adjusting the dose to achieve maximal efficacy in humans  based on the methods described above and other methods is well within the capabilities of the ordinarily skilled artisan.
Dosages may be varied depending upon the requirements of the patient and the compound being employed. The dose administered to a patient, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to affect a beneficial therapeutic response in the patient over time. The size of the dose also will be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects. Determination of the proper dosage for a particular situation is within the skill of the practitioner. Generally, treatment is initiated with smaller dosages which are less than the optimum dose of the compound. Thereafter, the dosage is increased by small increments until the optimum effect under circumstances is reached.
Dosage amounts and intervals can be adjusted individually to provide levels of the administered compound effective for the particular clinical indication being treated. This will provide a therapeutic regimen that is commensurate with the severity of the individual's disease state.
Utilizing the teachings provided herein, an effective prophylactic or therapeutic treatment regimen can be planned that does not cause substantial toxicity and yet is effective to treat the clinical symptoms demonstrated by the particular patient. This planning should involve the careful choice of active compound by considering factors such as compound potency, relative bioavailability, patient body weight, presence and severity of adverse side effects, preferred mode of administration and the toxicity profile of the selected agent.
In some embodiments, co-administration includes administering one active agent within 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24 hours, 2 days, 4 days, 1 week or 1 month of a second active agent. Co-administration includes administering two active agents simultaneously, approximately simultaneously (e.g., within about 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 minutes of each other) , or sequentially in any order. In some embodiments, co-administration can be accomplished by co-formulation, i.e., preparing a single pharmaceutical composition including both active agents. In other embodiments, the active agents can be formulated separately. In another embodiment, the active and/or adjunctive agents may be linked or conjugated to one another.
A “cell” as used herein, refers to a cell carrying out metabolic or other function sufficient to preserve or replicate its genomic DNA. A cell can be identified by well-known methods in the art including, for example, presence of an intact membrane, staining by a particular dye, ability to produce progeny or, in the case of a gamete, ability to combine with a second gamete to produce  a viable offspring. Cells may include prokaryotic and eukaroytic cells. Prokaryotic cells include but are not limited to bacteria. Eukaryotic cells include but are not limited to yeast cells and cells derived from plants and animals, for example mammalian, insect (e.g., spodoptera) and human cells. Cells may be useful when they are naturally nonadherent or have been treated not to adhere to surfaces, for example by trypsinization.
“Control” or “control experiment” is used in accordance with its plain ordinary meaning and refers to an experiment in which the subjects or reagents of the experiment are treated as in a parallel experiment except for omission of a procedure, reagent, or variable of the experiment. In some instances, the control is used as a standard of comparison in evaluating experimental effects. In some embodiments, a control is the measurement of the activity of a proteinin the absence of a compound as described herein (including embodiments and examples) .
The phrase “in a sufficient amount to effect a change” means that there is a detectable difference between a level of an indicator measured before (e.g., a baseline level) and after administration of a particular therapy. Indicators include any objective parameter (e.g., serum concentration) or subjective parameter (e.g., a subject’s feeling of well-being) .
“Substantially pure” indicates that a component makes up greater than about 75%of the total content of the composition excluding excipients, and typically greater than about 85%of the total content. More typically, “substantially pure” refers to compositions in which at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%or more of the total composition excluding excipients is the component of interest. In some cases, the component of interest will make up greater than about 90%, greater than about 95%, or greater than about 96%of the total content of the composition excluding excipients (percentage in a weight per weight basis) . “Substantially pure” indicates that the composition contains less than, up to, or no more than about 25%, 15%, 10%, 5%, or 4%of known or unknown impurities. Impurities do not include excipients (e.g., binders, fillers, diluents, glidants, lubricants, disintegrants, etc. )
“Angiogenesis” as used herein refers to the process through which new blood vessels form from pre-existing vessels. “Neovascularization” refers to the formation of new blood vessels, usually in the form of functional microvascular networks, capable of perfusion by red blood cells, which serve as collateral circulation in response to local poor perfusion or ischemia. Neovascularization is conventionally distinguished from angiogenesis in that angiogenesis is mainly characterized by the protrusion and outgrowth of capillary buds and sprouts from pre-existing blood vessels.
As used herein, the terms "corneal angiogenesis" and "corneal neovascularization" refer to the process of formation of new vessels originate and the corneal vessels extending from the limbus to the adjacent corneal stroma. Because the cornea is avascular, which does not contain any blood vessels, any new blood vessels in the cornea typically arise from the growth of blood vessels from the limbal vascular plexus area of the eye into the cornea.
"Choroidal neovascularization" refers to the formation of new vessels originating in the choroid, and can access the subretinal space through rupture of Bruch's membrane in the retinal pigment epithelium.
"Retinal neovascularization" refers to the formation of new vessels originate Retinal vessel and extending into the vitreous from the retinal surface.
"Iris neovascularization" is a medical condition of the iris of the eye in which new abnormal blood vessels (formed by neovascularization) are found on the surface of the iris. This condition is often associated with diabetes in advanced proliferative diabetic retinopathy. Other conditions causing rubeosis iridis include central retinal vein occlusion, ocular ischemic syndrome, and chronic retinal detachment.
Macular degeneration, also referred to as retinal degeneration, is a disease of the eye that involves deterioration of the macula, the central portion of the retina. Unless specified, the “macular degeneration” of the present disclosure includes all forms of the disease.
“Wet macular degeneration” also known as the neovascular or exudative form of macular degeneration in which new blood vessels form (i.e., neovascularization) to improve the blood supply to retinal tissue, specifically beneath the macula, a portion of the retina that is responsible for our sharp central vision. The new vessels are easily damaged and sometimes rupture, causing bleeding and injury to the surrounding tissue. Wet macular degeneration accounts for approximately 90%of macular degeneration-related blindness. Neovascularization can lead to rapid loss of vision and eventual scarring of the retinal tissues and bleeding in the eye. This scar tissue and blood produces a dark, distorted area in the vision, often rendering the eye legally blind. Wet macular degeneration usually starts with distortion in the central field of vision. Straight lines become wavy. Subjects with wet macular degeneration also report having blurred vision and blank spots (scotoma) in their visual field.
“Dispersing agents, ” and/or “viscosity modulating agents” include materials that control the diffusion and homogeneity of a drug through liquid media or a granulation method or blend method. In some embodiments, these agents also facilitate the effectiveness of a coating or  eroding matrix. Exemplary diffusion facilitators/dispersing agents include, e.g., hydrophilic polymers, electrolytes, 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000011
60 or 80, PEG, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP; commercially known as
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000012
) , and the carbohydrate-based dispersing agents such as, for example, hydroxypropyl celluloses (e.g., HPC, HPC-SL, and HPC-L) , hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses (e.g., HPMC K100, HPMC K4M, HPMC K15M, and HPMC K100M) , carboxymethylcellulose sodium, methylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate (HPMCAS) , noncrystalline cellulose, magnesium aluminum silicate, triethanolamine, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) , vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer (S630) , 4- (1, 1, 3, 3-tetramethylbutyl) -phenol polymer with ethylene oxide and formaldehyde (also known as tyloxapol) , poloxamers (e.g., Pluronics
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000013
and
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000014
which are block copolymers of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide) ; and poloxamines (e.g., Tetronic
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000015
also known as Poloxamine
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000016
which is a tetrafunctional block copolymer derived from sequential addition of propylene oxide and ethylene oxide to ethylenediamine (BASF Corporation, Parsippany, N.J. ) ) , polyvinylpyrrolidone K12, polyvinylpyrrolidone K17, polyvinylpyrrolidone K25, or polyvinylpyrrolidone K30, polyvinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer (S-630) , polyethylene glycol, e.g., the polyethylene glycol can have a molecular weight of about 300 to about 6000, or about 3350 to about 4000, or about 7000 to about 5400, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, polysorbate-80, sodium alginate, gums, such as, e.g., gum tragacanth and gum acacia, guar gum, xanthans, including xanthan gum, sugars, cellulosics, such as, e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polysorbate-80, sodium alginate, polyethoxylated sorbitan monolaurate, polyethoxylated sorbitan monolaurate, povidone, carbomers, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) , alginates, chitosans and combinations thereof. Plasticizcers such as cellulose or triethyl cellulose can also be used as dispersing agents. Dispersing agents particularly useful in liposomal dispersions and self-emulsifying dispersions are dimyristoyl phosphatidyl choline, natural phosphatidyl choline from eggs, natural phosphatidyl glycerol from eggs, cholesterol and isopropyl myristate.
The term “diluent” refers to chemical compounds that are used to dilute the compound of interest prior to delivery. Diluents can also be used to stabilize compounds because they can provide a more stable environment. Salts dissolved in buffered solutions (which also can provide pH control or maintenance) are utilized as diluents in the art, including, but not limited to a phosphate buffered saline solution. In certain embodiments, diluents increase bulk of the  composition to facilitate compression or create sufficient bulk for homogenous blend for capsule filling. Such compounds include e.g., lactose, starch, mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, microcrystalline cellulose such as
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000017
dibasic calcium phosphate, dicalcium phosphate dihydrate; tricalcium phosphate, calcium phosphate; anhydrous lactose, spray-dried lactose; pregelatinized starch, compressible sugar, such as
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000018
 (Amstar) ; mannitol, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate, sucrose-based diluents, confectioner's sugar; monobasic calcium sulfate monohydrate, calcium sulfate dihydrate; calcium lactate trihydrate, dextrates; hydrolyzed cereal solids, amylose; powdered cellulose, calcium carbonate; glycine, kaolin; mannitol, sodium chloride; inositol, bentonite, and the like.
The term “non water-soluble diluent” represents compounds typically used in the formulation of pharmaceuticals, such as calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, starches, modified starches and microcrystalline cellulose, and microcellulose (e.g., having a density of about 0.45 g/cm3, e.g., Avicel, powdered cellulose) , and talc.
“Solubilizers” include compounds such as triacetin, triethylcitrate, ethyl oleate, ethyl caprylate, sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium doccusate, vitamin E TPGS, dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, N-hydroxyethylpyrrolidone, polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cyclodextrins, ethanol, n-butanol, isopropyl alcohol, cholesterol, bile salts, polyethylene glycol 200-600, glycofurol, transcutol, propylene glycol, and dimethyl isosorbide and the like.
“Stabilizers” include compounds such as any antioxidation agents, buffers, acids, preservatives and the like.
“Suspending agents” include compounds such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone K12, polyvinylpyrrolidone K17, polyvinylpyrrolidone K25, or polyvinylpyrrolidone K30, vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer (S630) , polyethylene glycol, e.g., the polyethylene glycol can have a molecular weight of about 300 to about 6000, or about 3350 to about 4000, or about 7000 to about 5400, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose acetate stearate, polysorbate-80, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium alginate, gums, such as, e.g., gum tragacanth and gum acacia, guar gum, xanthans, including xanthan gum, sugars, cellulosics, such as, e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polysorbate-80, sodium alginate,  polyethoxylated sorbitan monolaurate, polyethoxylated sorbitan monolaurate, povidone and the like.
“Surfactants” include compounds such as sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium docusate, Tween 60 or 80, triacetin, vitamin E TPGS, sorbitan monooleate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polysorbates, polaxomers, bile salts, glyceryl monostearate, copolymers of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide, e.g., 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000019
 (BASF) , and the like. Some other surfactants include polyoxyethylene fatty acid glycerides and vegetable oils, e.g., polyoxyethylene (60) hydrogenated castor oil; and polyoxyethylene alkylethers and alkylphenyl ethers, e.g., octoxynol 10, octoxynol 40. In some embodiments, surfactants may be included to enhance physical stability or for other purposes. Many nonionic surfactants are known that are acceptable for topical ophthalmic formulations. Such surfactants include: tyloxapol; polyoxyethylene sorbitan esters, such as polysorbate 80, polysorbate 60, and polysorbate 20; polyethoxylated castor oils, such as Cremophore EL; polyethoxylated hydrogenated castor oils, such as HCO-40; and poloxamers.
The term “carrier, ” as used herein, refers to relatively nontoxic chemical compounds or agents that facilitate the incorporation of a compound into cells or tissues.
“Carrier materials” include any commonly used excipients in pharmaceutics and should be selected on the basis of compatibility with compounds disclosed herein, and the release profile properties of the desired dosage form. Exemplary carrier materials include, e.g., binders, suspending agents, disintegration agents, filling agents, surfactants, solubilizers, stabilizers, lubricants, wetting agents, diluents, and the like. “Pharmaceutically compatible carrier materials” may include, but are not limited to, acacia, gelatin, colloidal silicon dioxide, calcium glycerophosphate, calcium lactate, maltodextrin, glycerine, magnesium silicate, polyvinylpyrrollidone (PVP) , cholesterol, cholesterol esters, sodium caseinate, soy lecithin, taurocholic acid, phosphotidylcholine, sodium chloride, tricalcium phosphate, dipotassium phosphate, cellulose and cellulose conjugates, sugars sodium stearoyl lactylate, carrageenan, monoglyceride, diglyceride, pregelatinized starch, and the like. See, e.g., Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Ed (Easton, Pa.: Mack Publishing Company, 1995) ; Hoover, John E., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa. 1975; Liberman, H. A. and Lachman, L., Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York, N.Y., 1980; and Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, Seventh Ed.(Lippincott Williams &Wilkins 1999) .
“Wetting agents” include compounds such as oleic acid, glyceryl monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate, sodium docusate, sodium oleate, sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium doccusate, triacetin, Tween 80, vitamin E TPGS, ammonium salts and the like.
The compositions of the present invention are formulated to be isotonic, relative to the natural tear fluids. The compositions are therefore formulated to have an osmolality of about 280 to 320 milliosmoles per kilogram water ( "mOsm/kg" ) . If necessary, the compositions may contain ophthalmically acceptable tonicity-adjusting agents, such as sodium chloride, potassium chloride, glycerin, sorbitol or mannitol. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition further comprises a tonicity adjusting agent. In some embodiments, the tonicity adjusting agent is selected from sodium chloride, sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, sodium bisulfate, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, zinc chloride, potassium acetate, sodium acetate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium thiosulfate, magnesium sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, dextrose, mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, sucrose, urea, propylene glycol, glycerin, or a combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the composition is stored in a plastic container. In some embodiments, the material of the plastic container comprises low-density polyethylene (LDPE) .
In some embodiments, the composition further comprises a pH adjusting agent. In some embodiments, the ophthalmically acceptable carrier further comprises at least one viscosity-enhancing agent. In some embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing agent is selected from cellulose-based polymers, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene triblock copolymers, dextran-based polymers, polyvinyl alcohol, dextrin, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyalkylene glycols, chitosan, collagen, gelatin, hyaluronic acid, or combinations thereof.
I. Compositions
In an aspect, provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition, comprising:
(i) a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000020
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration.
In some embodiments, the dosage form is a suspension comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
In an aspect, provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition, comprising:
(i) fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000021
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension, a gel, or an ointment. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension.
In some embodiments, the particles are micronized.
In some embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 10 μm. In some embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.3 μm to about 5 μm.
In some embodiments, at least about 10%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 20%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 30%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 40%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 50%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 60%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 70%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 80%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm In some embodiments, at least about 90%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm. In some embodiments, at least about 95%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 0.5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1.5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D10 value of less than about 0.5, about 0.6, about 0.7, about 0.8, about 0.9, about 1.0, about 1.1, about 1.2, about 1.3, about1.4, or about 1.5 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 2.5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 7.5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D50 value of less than about 2.5, about 2.6, about 2.7, about 2.8, about 2.9, about 3.0, about 3.1, about 3.2, about 3.3, about 3.4, about 3.5, about 3.6, about 3.7, about 3.8, about 3.9, about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4.8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1, about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, about 6.0, about 6.1, about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, about 6.5, about 6.6, about 6.7, about 6.8, about 6.9, about 7.0, about 7.1, about 7.2, about 7.3, about 7.4, or about 7.5 μm.
In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 5 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 10 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 15 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4.8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1, about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.5,  about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0 μm. In some embodiments, the particles have a D90 value of less than about 5, about 6, about 7, about 8, about 9, about 10, about 11, about 12, about 13, about 14, or about 15 μm.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; is crystalline, microcrystalline, amorphous, or lyophilized.
In some embodiments, the dosage form is a modified-release dosage form. In some embodiments, the modified-release dosage form is a delayed-release dosage form, an extended-release (ER) dosage form, or a targeted-release dosage form. In some embodiments, the ER dosage form is a sustained-release (SR) dosage form or controlled-release (CR) dosage form. In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.025%to about 2.0%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.5%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.15%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
In some embodiments, the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a diluent, buffering agent, suspending agent, solubilizer, emulsifier, antioxidant, pH adjusting agent, preservative, detackifier, anti-foaming agent, chelating agent, thickening agent, viscomodulator, tonicifier, colorant, opacifier, binder, filler, plasticizer, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a suspending agent, a wetting agent, a pH adjuster, an anti-oxidant, an osmotic pressure regulator, or any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the suspending agent is a polymer. In some embodiments, the suspending agent is a carbomer homopolymer, carbomer copolymer, carbomer interpolymer, polycarbophil, a cellulose derivative, a polyvinyl alcohol, a povidone, a hyaluronic acid or a salt thereof, chondroitin sulfate, a natural gum, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the cellulose derivative is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) is K100, K4M, K15M, K100M, E4M, E10M, or any combination thereof. In some  embodiments, the suspending agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) . In some embodiments, the hypromellose is HPMC E4M.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the suspending agent in the compositions is up to about 1%w/w. In some embodiments, the concentration of the suspending agent in the formulation is up to about 0.5%w/w.
In some embodiments, the solubilizer is 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000022
ELP, 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000023
HS 15, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the solubilizer is 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000024
HS 15.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the solubilizer in the composition is up to about 5%w/w.
In some embodiments, the wetting agent is polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate.
In some embodiments, the pH adjuster is a buffer. In some embodiments, the buffer is a phosphate buffer or a hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the phosphate buffer is potassium phosphate or a hydrate thereof. In some embodiments, the phosphate buffer is sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate (NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O) , or a combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the osmotic pressure regulator is a salt. In some embodiments, the salt is sodium chloride.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the osmotic pressure regulator in the composition is up to about 0.5%w/w.
In some embodiments, the anti-oxidant is a thiosulfate. In some embodiments, the thiosulfate is sodium thiosulfate.
In some embodiments, the concentration of the anti-oxidant in the composition is up to about 0.2%w/w.
In some embodiments, the composition is stable for up to 24 months at a temperature of from about 20 ℃ to about 25 ℃.
In some embodiments, the composition is substantially free of impurities.
In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 90%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 95%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 96%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 97%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 98%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 99%pure. In some embodiments, the composition is at least about 99.1%, about  99.2%, about 99.3%, about 99.4%, about 99.5%, about 99.6%, about 99.7%, about 99.8%, about 99.9%, or about 100%pure.
In some embodiments, the composition comprises up to about 2%w/w of total impurities. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than about 0.9%w/w, about 0.8%w/w, about 0.7%w/w, about 0.6%w/w, about 0.5%w/w, about 0.4%w/w, about 0.3%w/w, about 0.2%w/w, or about 0.1%w/w of total impurities.
In some embodiments, the impurity is a degradant.
In some embodiments, the impurity comprises the compound of Formula (II) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000025
In some embodiments, the composition comprises up to about 2.0%w/w of any individual impurity.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
Antimicrobial agents such as antibiotics or anti-fungal agents may be added. Other substances can be added to the compositions to stabilize and/or preserve the compositions. The material can be packaged and stored, for example, at room temperature, or for example, at -20 ℃ or -80 ℃ prior to use.
In some aspects, described herein are formulations that do not have a dose-to-dose variation.
In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is between about 20 ℃and about 70 ℃. In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is between about 25 ℃ and about 65 ℃, about 30 ℃ and about 60 ℃, about 35 ℃ and about 55 ℃, or about about 40 ℃ and about 50 ℃. In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is about 25 ℃. In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is about 40 ℃. In some embodiments, the temperature of the storage condition is about 60 ℃.
In some embodiments, the relative humidity of the storage condition is between about 50%and about 80%, or between about 60%and about 75%. In some embodiments, the relative  humidity of the storage condition is about 60%. In some embodiments, the relative humidity of the storage condition is about 75%.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.1.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.1. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.0. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 2.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 1.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 1.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.4%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the  ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.3%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.2%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises less than 0.1%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition.
Aqueous Solution Stability
In some embodiments, the composition described herein comprises a buffer. In some embodiments, a buffer is selected from borates, borate-polyol complexes, phosphate buffering agents, citrate buffering agents, acetate buffering agents, carbonate buffering agents, organic buffering agents, amino acid buffering agents, or combinations thereof.
In some instances, borates include boric acid, salts of boric acid, other pharmaceutically acceptable borates, and combinations thereof. In some cases, borates include boric acid, sodium borate, potassium borate, calcium borate, magnesium borate, manganese borate, and other such borate salts.
As used herein, the term polyol includes any compound having at least one hydroxyl group on each of two adjacent carbon atoms that are not in trans configuration relative to each other. The polyols can be linear or cyclic, substituted or unsubstituted, or mixtures thereof, so long as the resultant complex is water soluble and pharmaceutically acceptable. In some instances, examples of polyol include: sugars, sugar alcohols, sugar acids and uronic acids. In some cases, polyols include, but are not limited to: mannitol, glycerin, xylitol and sorbitol.
In some embodiments, phosphate buffering agents include phosphoric acid; alkali metal phosphates such as disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, trisodium phosphate, dipotassium hydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, and tripotassium phosphate; alkaline earth metal phosphates such as calcium phosphate, calcium hydrogen phosphate, calcium dihydrogen phosphate, monomagnesium phosphate, dimagnesium phosphate (magnesium hydrogen phosphate) , and trimagnesium phosphate; ammonium phosphates such as diammonium hydrogen phosphate and ammonium dihydrogen phosphate; or a combination thereof. In some instances, the phosphate buffering agent is an anhydride. In some instances, the phosphate buffering agent is a hydrate.
In some embodiments, borate-polyol complexes include those described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,503,497. In some instances, the borate-polyol complexes comprise borates in an amount of from about 0.01 to about 2.0%w/v, and one or more polyols in an amount of from about 0.01%to about 5.0%w/v.
In some cases, citrate buffering agents include citric acid and sodium citrate.
In some instances, acetate buffering agents include acetic acid, potassium acetate, and sodium acetate.
In some instances, carbonate buffering agents include sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate.
In some cases, organic buffering agents include Good’s Buffer, such as for example 2- (N-morpholino) ethanesulfonic acid (MES) , N- (2-Acetamido) iminodiacetic acid, N- (Carbamoylmethyl) iminodiacetic acid (ADA) , piperazine-N, N’-bis (2-ethanesulfonic acid (PIPES) , N- (2-acetamido) -2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES) , β-Hydroxy-4-morpholinepropanesulfonic acid, 3-Morpholino-2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid (MOPSO) , cholamine chloride, 3- (N-morpholino) propansulfonic acid (MOPS) , N, N-bis (2-hydroxyethyl) -2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES) , 2- [ (2-Hydroxy-1, 1-bis (hydroxymethyl) ethyl) amino] ethanesulfonic acid (TES) , 4- (2-hydroxyethyl) -1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid (HEPES) , 3- (N, N-Bis [2-hydroxyethyl] amino) -2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid (DIPSO) , acetamidoglycine, 3- { [1, 3-Dihydroxy-2- (hydroxymethyl) -2-propanyl] amino} -2-hydroxy-1-propanesulfonic acid (TAPSO) , piperazine-1, 4, -bis (2-hydroxypropanesulphonic acid) (POPSO) , 4- (2-hydroxyethyl) piperazine-1- (2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid) hydrate (HEPPSO) , 3- [4- (2-hydroxyethyl) -1-piperazinyl] propanesulfonic acid (HEPPS) , tricine, glycinamide, bicine or N-tris (hydroxymethyl) methyl-3-aminopropanesulfonic acid sodium (TAPS) ; glycine; and diethanolamine (DEA) .
In some cases, amino acid buffering agents include taurine, aspartic acid and its salts (e.g., potassium salts, etc) , E-aminocaproic acid, and the like.
In some instances, the compositions described herein further comprise a tonicity adjusting agent. Tonicity adjusting agent is an agent introduced into a preparation such as an ophthalmic composition to reduce local irritation by preventing osmotic shock at the site of application. In some instances, buffer solution and/or a pH adjusting agent that broadly maintains the ophthalmic solution at a particular ion concentration and pH are considered as tonicity adjusting  agents. In some cases, tonicity adjusting agents include various salts, such as halide salts of a monovalent cation. In some cases, tonicity adjusting agents include mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, sucrose, urea, and glycerin. In some instances, suitable tonicity adjustors comprise sodium chloride, sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, sodium bisulfate, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, zinc chloride, potassium acetate, sodium acetate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium thiosulfate, magnesium sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, dextrose, mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, sucrose, urea, propylene glycol, glycerin, or a combination thereof.
In some instances, the concentration of the tonicity adjusting agent in a composition described herein is between about 0.5%and about 2.0%. In some instances, the concentration of the tonicity adjusting agent in a composition described herein is between about 0.7%and about 1.8%, about 0.8%and about 1.5%, or about 1%and about 1.3%. In some instances, the concentration of the tonicity adjusting agent is about 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, or 1.9%. In some cases, the percentage is a weight percentage.
In some cases, the composition described herein further comprises a pH adjusting agent. The pH adjusting agent is used which can be acid or base. The base can be oxides, hydroxides, carbonates, bicarbonates and the likes. The oxides can be metal oxides such as calcium oxide, magnesium oxide and the likes; hydroxides can be of alkali metals and alkaline earth metals such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide and the likes and carbonates can be sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonates, potassium bicarbonates and the likes. The acid can be mineral acid and organic acids such as hydrochloric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, acetic acid, citric acid, fumaric acid, malic acid tartaric acid and the likes. In some instances, the pH adjusting agent includes, but is not limited to, acetate, bicarbonate, ammonium chloride, citrate, phosphate, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof and combinations or mixtures thereof.
As described elsewhere herein, the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH  of more than about 4.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 4.1.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 5.1.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 7.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of more than about 6.1.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.1.
In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.9. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.8. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of  less than about 7.7. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.6. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.5. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.4. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.3. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.2. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.1. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.0.
In some instances, the composition described herein further comprises a disinfecting agent. In some cases, disinfecting agents include polymeric biguanides, polymeric quarternary ammonium compounds, chlorites, bisbiguanides, chlorite compounds (e.g., potassium chlorite, sodium chlorite, calcium chlorite, magnesium chlorite, or mixtures thereof) , and a combination thereof.
In some instances, the composition described herein further comprises a preservative. In some cases, a perservative is added at a concentration to a composition described herein to prevent the growth of or to destroy a microorganism introduced into the composition. In some instances, microorganisms refer to bacteria (e.g., Proteus mirabilis, Serratia marcesens) , virus (e.g., Herpes simplex virus, herpes zoster virus) , fungus (e.g. fungi from the genus Fusarium) , yeast (e.g., Candida albicans) , parasites (e.g., Plasmodium spp., Gnathostoma spp. ) , protozoan (e.g., Giardia lamblia) , nematodes (e.g., Onchocercus volvulus) , worm (e.g., Dirofilaria immitis) , and/or amoeba (e.g., Acanthameoba) .
In some instances, the concentration of the preservative is between about 0.0001%and about 1%, about 0.001%and about 0.8%, about 0.004%and about 0.5%, about 0.008 %and about 0.1%, and about 0.01%and about 0.08%. In some cases, the concentration of the preservatives is about 0.001%, 0.002%, 0.003%, 0.004%, 0.005%, 0.006%, 0.008%, 0.009%, 0.009%, 0.01%, 0.015%, 0.02%, 0.025%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%or 1.0%.
In some embodiments, the preservative is selected from benzalkonium chloride, cetrimonium, sodium perborate, stabilized oxychloro complex, SofZia (Alcon) , polyquaternium-1, chlorobutanol, edetate disodium, and polyhexamethylene biguanide.
In some embodiments, the composition described herein is stored in a plastic container. In some embodiments, the material of the plastic container comprises high density polyethylene (HDPE) , low density polyethylene (LDPE) , polyethylene terephthalate (PET) , polyvinyl chloride (PVC) , polyprolyene (PP) , polystyrene (PS) , fluorine treated HDPE, post consumer resin (PCR) ,  K-resine (SBC) , or bioplastic. In some embodients, the material of the plastic container comprises LDPE.
In some embodiments, the composition described herein is stored in a plastic container.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.8. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.7. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.6. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.5. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.4. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.3. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.2. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.1.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.8. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.7. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.6. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.5. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.4. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.3. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.2. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a pH of less than about 7.1. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.0.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 80%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 85%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 90%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 93%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 95%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 97%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 98%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 99%after extended period of time under storage condition. In some instances, the storage condition comprises a temperatue of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60℃. In some instances, the extended period of time is at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 80%at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 85%at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 90%at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 93%at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 95%at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 97%at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 98%at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 99%at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 80%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 85%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 90%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 93%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 95%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 97%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 98%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container has a potency of at least 99%for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.4%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.3%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.2%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.1%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent after extended period of time under storage condition. In some instances, the storage condition comprises a temperatue of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some instances, the extended period of time is at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.5%of primary  degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.4%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.3%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.2%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.1%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent at a temperature of about 25 ℃, about 40 ℃, or about 60 ℃.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 2.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 1.0%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2  weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.5%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.4%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.3%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.2%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a plastic container comprises less than 0.1%of primary degradant based on the concentration of the ophthalmic agent for a period of at least 1 week, at least 2 weeks, at least 3 weeks, at least 1 month, at least 2 months, at least 3 months, at least 4 months, at least 5 months, at least 6 months, at least 8 months, at least 10 months, at least 12 months, at least 18 months, or at least 24 months.
In some embodiments, the composition described herein is stored in a glass container. In some embodiments, the glass container is a glass vial, such as for example, a type I, type II or type III glass vial. In some embodiments, the glass container is a type I glass vial. In some embodiments, the type I glass vial is a borasilicate glass vial.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0.  In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.8. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.7. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.6. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.5. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.4. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.3. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.2. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.1.
In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 8.0. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.9. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.8. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.7. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.6. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.5. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.4. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.3. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.2. In some embodiments, the composition stored in a glass container has a pH of less than about 7.1. In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of less than about 7.0.
In some embodiments, the composition described herein is formulaed as an aqueous solution. In some embodients, the aqueous solution is a stable aqueous solution. In some instances, the aqueous solution is stored in a plastic container as described above. In some instances, the aqueous solution is not stored in a glass container. In some instances, the aqueous solution is stored in the dark. In some instances, the aqueous solution is stored in the presence of light. In some instances, the aqueous solution is stable in the presence of light.
Other stabilizers that are useful in the ophthalmically acceptable formulations disclosed herein include, for example, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, alcohols, long chain fatty acid esters, long chain ethers, hydrophilic derivatives of fatty acids, polyvinyl pyrrolidones, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl alcohols, hydrocarbons, hydrophobic polymers, moisture-absorbing polymers, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, amide analogues of stabilizers are also used. In further embodiments, the chosen stabilizer changes the hydrophobicity of the formulation, improves the mixing of various components in the formulation, controls the moisture level in the formula, or controls the mobility of the phase.
In other embodiments, stabilizers are present in sufficient amounts to inhibit the degradation of the ophthalmic agent. Examples of such stabilizing agents, include, but are not limited to: glycerol, methionine, monothioglycerol, EDTA, ascorbic acid, polysorbate 80, polysorbate 20, arginine, heparin, dextran sulfate, cyclodextrins, pentosan polysulfate and other heparinoids, divalent cations such as magnesium and zinc, or combinations thereof.
Additional useful stabilization agents for ophthalmically acceptable formulations include one or more anti-aggregation additives to enhance stability of ophthalmic formulations by reducing the rate of protein aggregation. The anti-aggregation additive selected depends upon the nature of the conditions to which the ophthalmic agents are exposed. For example, certain formulations undergoing agitation and thermal stress require a different anti-aggregation additive than a formulation undergoing lyophilization and reconstitution. Useful anti-aggregation additives include, by way of example only, urea, guanidinium chloride, simple amino acids such as glycine or arginine, sugars, polyalcohols, polysorbates, polymers such as polyethylene glycol and dextrans, alkyl saccharides, such as alkyl glycoside, and surfactants.
Other useful formulations optionally include one or more ophthalmically acceptable antioxidants to enhance chemical stability where required. Suitable antioxidants include, by way of example only, ascorbic acid, methionine, sodium thiosulfate and sodium metabisulfite. In one embodiment, antioxidants are selected from metal chelating agents, thiol containing compounds and other general stabilizing agents.
Still other useful compositions include one or more ophthalmically acceptable surfactants to enhance physical stability or for other purposes. Suitable nonionic surfactants include, but are not limited to, polyoxyethylene fatty acid glycerides and vegetable oils, e.g., polyoxyethylene (60) hydrogenated castor oil; and polyoxyethylene alkylethers and alkylphenyl ethers, e.g., octoxynol 10, octoxynol 40.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmically acceptable pharmaceutical formulations described herein are stable with respect to compound degradation (e.g. less than 30%degradation, less than 25%degradation, less than 20%degradation, less than 15%degradation, less than 10%degradation, less than 8%degradation, less than 5%degradation, less than 3%degradation, less than 2%degradation, or less than 5%degradation) over a period of any of at least about 1 day, at least about 2 days, at least about 3 days, at least about 4 days, at least about 5 days, at least about 6 days, at least about 1 week, at least about 2 weeks, at least about 3 weeks, at least about 4 weeks, at least about 5 weeks, at least about 6 weeks, at least about 7 weeks, at least about 8 weeks, at least about 3 months, at least about 4 months, at least about 5 months, or at least about 6 months under storage conditions (e.g. room temperature) . In other embodiments, the formulations described herein are stable with respect to compound degradation over a period of at least about 1 week. Also described herein are formulations that are stable with respect to compound degradation over a period of at least about 1 month.
In other embodiments, an additional surfactant (co-surfactant) and/or buffering agent is combined with one or more of the pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles previously described herein so that the surfactant and/or buffering agent maintains the product at an optimal pH for stability. Suitable co-surfactants include, but are not limited to: a) natural and synthetic lipophilic agents, e.g., phospholipids, cholesterol, and cholesterol fatty acid esters and derivatives thereof; b) nonionic surfactants, which include for example, polyoxyethylene fatty alcohol esters, sorbitan fatty acid esters (Spans) , polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters (e.g., polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monooleate (Tween 80) , polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monostearate (Tween 60) , polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate (Tween 20) and other Tweens, sorbitan esters, glycerol esters, e.g., Myrj and glycerol triacetate (triacetin) , polyethylene glycols, cetyl alcohol, cetostearyl alcohol, stearyl alcohol, polysorbate 80, poloxamers, poloxamines, polyoxyethylene castor oil derivatives (e.g., 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000026
RH40, Cremphor A25, Cremphor A20, 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000027
EL) and other Cremophors, sulfosuccinates, alkyl sulphates (SLS) ; PEG glyceryl fatty acid esters such as PEG-8 glyceryl caprylate/caprate (Labrasol) , PEG-4 glyceryl caprylate/caprate (Labrafac Hydro WL 1219) , PEG-32 glyceryl laurate (Gelucire 444/14) , PEG-6 glyceryl mono oleate (Labrafil M 1944 CS) , PEG-6 glyceryl linoleate (Labrafil M 2125 CS) ; propylene glycol mono-and di-fatty acid esters, such as propylene glycol laurate, propylene glycol caprylate/caprate; 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000028
700, ascorbyl-6-palmitate, stearylamine, sodium lauryl sulfate, polyoxethyleneglycerol triiricinoleate, and any combinations or mixtures thereof; c) anionic surfactants include, but are  not limited to, calcium carboxymethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, sodium sulfosuccinate, dioctyl, sodium alginate, alkyl polyoxyethylene sulfates, sodium lauryl sulfate, triethanolamine stearate, potassium laurate, bile salts, and any combinations or mixtures thereof; and d) cationic surfactants such as cetyltrimethylammonium bromide, and lauryldimethylbenzyl-ammonium chloride.
In a further embodiment, when one or more co-surfactants are utilized in the ophthalmically acceptable formulations of the present disclosure, they are combined, e.g., with a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle and is present in the final formulation, e.g., in an amount ranging from about 0.1%to about 20%, from about 0.5%to about 10%.
In one embodiment, the surfactant has an HLB value of 0 to 20. In additional embodiments, the surfactant has an HLB value of 0 to 3, of 4 to 6, of 7 to 9, of 8 to 18, of 13 to 15, of 10 to 18.
Aqueous Solution Dose-To-Dose Uniformity
Typical ophthalmic aqueous solutions are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops. For example, a single administration (i.e., a single dose) of an ophthalmic aqueous solution may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient. In some embodiments, one dose of the ophthalmic aqueous solution described herein is one drop of the aqueous solution composition from the eye drop bottle.
In some cases, described herein include ophthalmic aqueous compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 50%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 40%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 30%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 20%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 10%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 5%.
In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 10 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 8 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 5 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 3 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 2 consecutive doses.
A nonsettling formulation should not require shaking to disperse drug uniformly. A “no-shake” formulation is potentially advantageous over formulations that require shaking for the simple reason that patients’ shaking behavior is a major source of variability in the amount of drug dosed. It has been reported that patients often times do not or forget to shake their ophthalmic compositions that requires shaking before administering a dose, despite the instructions to shake that were clearly marked on the label. On the other hand, even for those patients who do shake the product, it is normally not possible to determine whether the shaking is adequate in intensity and/or duration to render the product uniform. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic compositions described herein are “no-shake” formulations that maintained the dose-to-dose uniformity described herein.
To evaluate the dose-to-dose uniformity, drop bottles or tubes containing the ophthalmic (aqueous) compositions are stored upright for a minimum of 12 hours prior to the start of the test. To simulate the recommended dosing of these products, predetermined number of drops or strips are dispensed from each commercial bottles or tubes at predetermined time intervals for an extended period of time or until no product was left in the bottle or tube. All drops and strips are dispensed into tared glass vials, capped, and stored at room temperature until analysis. Aqueous Solution Viscosity
In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 10 to about 50,000 cps at about 20 ℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 100 to about 40,000 cps at about 20℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 500 to about 30,000 cps at about 20℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 1000 to about 20,000 cps at about 20 ℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 2000 to about 10,000 cps at about 20 ℃ and sheer  rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 4000 to about 8000 cps at about 20 ℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic aqueous formulation contains a viscosity enhancing agent sufficient to provide a viscosity of between about 500 and 50,000 centipoise, between about 750 and 50,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 50,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 40,000 centipoise; between about 2000 and 30,000 centipoise; between about 3000 and 20,000 centipoise; between about 4000 and 10,000 centipoise, or between about 5000 and 8000 centipoise.
pH
In some embodiments, the pH of a composition described herein is adjusted (e.g., by use of a buffer and/or a pH adjusting agent) to an ophthalmically compatible pH range of from about 4.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
In some embodiments, useful formulations also include one or more pH adjusting agents or buffering agents. Suitable pH adjusting agents or buffers include, but are not limited to acetate, bicarbonate, ammonium chloride, citrate, phosphate, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof and combinations or mixtures thereof.
In one embodiment, when one or more buffers are utilized in the formulations of the present disclosure, they are combined, e.g., with a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle and are present in the final formulation, e.g., in an amount ranging from about 0.1%to about 20%, from about 0.5%to about 10%. In certain embodiments of the present disclosure, the amount of buffer included in the formulations is such that the pH of the formulation does not interfere with the body's natural buffering system.
In one embodiment, diluents are also used to stabilize compounds because they can provide a more stable environment. Salts dissolved in buffered solutions (which also can provide pH control or maintenance) are utilized as diluents in the art, including, but not limited to a phosphate buffered saline solution.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition described herein has a pH of from about 4.0-9.0, from about 5.0 to about 8.0, from about 6.5 to about 8.0, from about 6.5 and about 8.0, or from about 7.0 and about 8.0.
In some embodiment, the ophthalmic composition described herein has a pH of 6.0, about 6.1, about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, about 6.5, about 6.6, about 6.7, about 6.8, about 6.9, about 7.0, about 7.1, about 7.2, about 7.3, about 7.4, about 7.5, about 7.6, about 7.7, about 7.8, about 7.9, about 8.0, about 8.1, about 8.2, about 8.3, about 8.4, about 8.5, about 8.6, about 8.7, about 8.8, about 8.9, about 9.0.
In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of any of at least about 1 day, at least about 2 days, at least about 3 days, at least about 4 days, at least about 5 days, at least about 6 days, at least about 1 week, at least about 2 weeks, at least about 3 weeks, at least about 4 weeks, at least about 5 weeks, at least about 6 weeks, at least about 7 weeks, at least about 8 weeks, at least about 1 month, at least about 2 months, at least about 3 months, at least about 4 months, at least about 5 months, at least about 6 months, at least about 7 months, at least about 8 months, at least about 9 months, at least about 10 months, at least about 11 months, at least about 12 months, at least about 18 months, at least about 24 months, at least about 3 years, at least about 4 years, at least about 5 years, or more. In other embodiments, the formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 1 week. In other embodiments, the formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 2 weeks. In other embodiments, the formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 3 weeks. In other embodiments, the formulations described herein are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 1 month. Also described herein are formulations that are stable with respect to pH over a period of at least about 2 months, or more.
Osmolarity
In some embodiments, a composition disclosed herein is formulated in order to not disrupt the ionic balance of the eye. In some embodiments, a composition disclosed herein has an ionic balance that is the same as or substantially the same as the eye. In some embodiments, a composition disclosed herein does not does not disrupt the ionic balance of the eye.
As used herein, “practical osmolarity/osmolality” or “deliverable osmolarity/osmolality” means the osmolarity/osmolality of a composition as determined by measuring the osmolarity/osmolality of the ophthalmic agent and all excipients except the gelling and/or the thickening agent (e.g., polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose or the like) . The practical osmolarity of a composition disclosed herein is measured by a suitable method, e.g., a freezing point depression method as described in Viegas et. al., Int. J. Pharm.,  1998, 160, 157-162. In some instances, the practical osmolarity of a composition disclosed herein is measured by vapor pressure osmometry (e.g., vapor pressure depression method) that allows for determination of the osmolarity of a composition at higher temperatures.
In some embodiments, the osmolarity at a target site of action (e.g., the eye) is about the same as the delivered osmolarity of a composition described herein. In some embodiments, a composition described herein has a deliverable osmolarity of about 150 mOsm/L to about 500 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 500 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 350 mOsm/L, about 280 mOsm/L to about 370 mOsm/L or about 250 mOsm/L to about 320 mOsm/L.
The practical osmolality of an ophthalmic composition disclosed herein is from about 100 mOsm/kg to about 1000 mOsm/kg, from about 200 mOsm/kg to about 800 mOsm/kg, from about 250 mOsm/kg to about 500 mOsm/kg, or from about 250 mOsm/kg to about 320 mOsm/kg, or from about 250 mOsm/kg to about 350 mOsm/kg or from about 280 mOsm/kg to about 320 mOsm/kg. In some embodiments, a composition described herein has a practical osmolarity of about 100 mOsm/L to about 1000 mOsm/L, about 200 mOsm/L to about 800 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 500 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 350 mOsm/L, about 250 mOsm/L to about 320 mOsm/L, or about 280 mOsm/L to about 320 mOsm/L.
In some embodiments, suitable tonicity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to any pharmaceutically acceptable sugar, salt or any combinations or mixtures thereof, such as, but not limited to dextrose, glycerin, mannitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride, and other electrolytes. In some instances, the tonicity adjusting agent is selected from sodium chloride, sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, sodium bisulfate, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, zinc chloride, potassium acetate, sodium acetate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium thiosulfate, magnesium sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, dextrose, mannitol, sorbitol, dextrose, sucrose, urea, propylene glycol, glycerin, or a combination thereof.
In some embodiment, the ophthalmic compositions described herein include one or more salts in an amount required to bring osmolality of the composition into an acceptable range. Such salts include those having sodium, potassium or ammonium cations and chloride, citrate, ascorbate, borate, phosphate, bicarbonate, sulfate, thiosulfate or bisulfite anions; suitable salts include sodium chloride, potassium chloride, sodium thiosulfate, sodium bisulfite and ammonium sulfate.
Sterility
In some embodiments, the compositions are sterilized. Included within the embodiments disclosed herein are means and processes for sterilization of a pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein for use in humans. The goal is to provide a safe pharmaceutical product, relatively free of infection causing micro-organisms. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration has provided regulatory guidance in the publication “Guidance for Industry: Sterile Drug Products Produced by Aseptic Processing” available at: http: //www. fda. gov/cder/guidance/5882fnl. htm, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
As used herein, sterilization means a process used to destroy or remove microorganisms that are present in a product or packaging. Any suitable method available for sterilization of objects and compositions is used. Available methods for the inactivation of microorganisms include, but are not limited to, the application of extreme heat, lethal chemicals, or gamma radiation. In some embodiments, a process for the preparation of an ophthalmic formulation comprises subjecting the formulation to a sterilization method selected from heat sterilization, chemical sterilization, radiation sterilization or filtration sterilization. The method used depends largely upon the nature of the device or composition to be sterilized. Detailed descriptions of many methods of sterilization are given in Chapter 40 of Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy published by Lippincott, Williams &Wilkins, and is incorporated by reference with respect to this subject matter.
Filtration
Filtration sterilization is a method used to remove but not destroy microorganisms from solutions. Membrane filters are used to filter heat-sensitive solutions. Such filters are thin, strong, homogenous polymers of mixed cellulosic esters (MCE) , polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF; also known as PVDF) , or polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and have pore sizes ranging from 0.1 to 0.22 μm. Solutions of various characteristics are optionally filtered using different filter membranes. For example, PVF and PTFE membranes are well suited to filtering organic solvents while aqueous solutions are filtered through PVF or MCE membranes. Filter apparatus are available for use on many scales ranging from the single point-of-use disposable filter attached to a syringe up to commercial scale filters for use in manufacturing plants. The membrane filters are sterilized by autoclave or chemical sterilization. Validation of membrane filtration systems is performed following standardized protocols (Microbiological Evaluation of Filters for Sterilizing Liquids, Vol 4, No. 3. Washington, D.C: Health Industry Manufacturers Association, 1981) and  involve challenging the membrane filter with a known quantity (ca. 10 7/cm 2) of unusually small microorganisms, such as Brevundimonas diminuta (ATCC 19146) .
Pharmaceutical compositions are optionally sterilized by passing through membrane filters. Formulations comprising nanoparticles (U.S. Pat No. 6,139,870) or multilamellar vesicles (Richard et al., International Journal of Pharmaceutics (2006) , 312 (1-2) : 144-50) are amenable to sterilization by filtration through 0.22 μm filters without destroying their organized structure.
In some embodiments, the methods disclosed herein comprise sterilizing the formulation (or components thereof) by means of filtration sterilization. In ophthalmic gel compositions that includes thermosetting polymers, filtration is carried out below (e.g. about 5 ℃) the gel temperature (Tgel) of a formulation described herein and with viscosity that allows for filtration in a reasonable time using a peristaltic pump (e.g. below a theoretical value of 100 cP ) .
Accordingly, provided herein are methods for sterilization of ophthalmic formulations that prevent degradation of polymeric components (e.g., thermosetting and/or other viscosity enhancing agents) and/or the ophthalmic agent during the process of sterilization. In some embodiments, degradation of the ophthalmic agent is reduced or eliminated through the use of specific pH ranges for buffer components and specific proportions of viscosity enhancing agents in the formulations. In some embodiments, the choice of an appropriate viscosity enhancing agents or thermosetting polymer allows for sterilization of formulations described herein by filtration. In some embodiments, the use of an appropriate thermosetting polymer or other viscosity enhancing agents in combination with a specific pH range for the formulation allows for high temperature sterilization of formulations described with substantially no degradation of the therapeutic agent or the polymeric excipients. An advantage of the methods of sterilization provided herein is that, in certain instances, the formulations are subjected to terminal sterilization via autoclaving without any loss of the ophthalmic agent and/or excipients and/or viscosity enhancing agents during the sterilization step and are rendered substantially free of microbes and/or pyrogens.
Radiation Sterilization
One advantage of radiation sterilization is the ability to sterilize many types of products without heat degradation or other damage. The radiation commonly employed is beta radiation or alternatively, gamma radiation from a  60Co source. The penetrating ability of gamma radiation allows its use in the sterilization of many product types, including solutions, compositions and heterogeneous mixtures. The germicidal effects of irradiation arise from the interaction of  gamma radiation with biological macromolecules. This interaction generates charged species and free-radicals. Subsequent chemical reactions, such as rearrangements and cross-linking processes, result in the loss of normal function for these biological macromolecules. The formulations described herein are also optionally sterilized using beta irradiation.
Sterilization by Heat
Many methods are available for sterilization by the application of high heat. One method is through the use of a saturated steam autoclave. In this method, saturated steam at a temperature of at least 121 ℃ is allowed to contact the object to be sterilized. The transfer of heat is either directly to the microorganism, in the case of an object to be sterilized, or indirectly to the microorganism by heating the bulk of an aqueous solution to be sterilized. This method is widely practiced as it allows flexibility, safety and economy in the sterilization process.
Microorganisms
In some embodiments, the compositions are substantially free of microorganisms. Acceptable bioburden or sterility levels are based on applicable standards that define therapeutically acceptable compositions, including but not limited to United States Pharmacopeia Chapters <1111> et seq. For example, acceptable sterility (e.g., bioburden) levels include about 10 colony forming units (cfu) per gram of formulation, about 50 cfu per gram of formulation, about 100 cfu per gram of formulation, about 500 cfu per gram of formulation or about 1000 cfu per gram of formulation. In some embodiments, acceptable bioburden levels or sterility for formulations include less than 10 cfu/mL, less that 50 cfu/mL, less than 500 cfu/mL or less than 1000 cfu/mL microbial agents. In addition, acceptable bioburden levels or sterility include the exclusion of specified objectionable microbiological agents. By way of example, specified objectionable microbiological agents include but are not limited to Escherichia coli (E. coli) , Salmonella sp., Pseudomonas aeruginosa (P. aeruginosa) and/or other specific microbial agents.
An important component of the sterility assurance quality control, quality assurance and validation process is the method of sterility testing. Sterility testing, by way of example only, is performed by two methods. The first is direct inoculation wherein a sample of the composition to be tested is added to growth medium and incubated for a period of time up to 21 days. Turbidity of the growth medium indicates contamination. Drawbacks to this method include the small sampling size of bulk materials which reduces sensitivity, and detection of microorganism growth based on a visual observation. An alternative method is membrane filtration sterility testing. In this method, a volume of product is passed through a small membrane filter paper. The  filter paper is then placed into media to promote the growth of microorganisms. This method has the advantage of greater sensitivity as the entire bulk product is sampled. The commercially available Millipore Steritest sterility testing system is optionally used for determinations by membrane filtration sterility testing. For the filtration testing of creams or ointments Steritest filter system No. TLHVSL210 are used. For the filtration testing of emulsions or viscous products Steritest filter system No. TLAREM210 or TDAREM210 are used. For the filtration testing of pre-filled syringes Steritest filter system No. TTHASY210 are used. For the filtration testing of material dispensed as an aerosol or foam Steritest filter system No. TTHVA210 are used. For the filtration testing of soluble powders in ampoules or vials Steritest filter system No. TTHADA210 or TTHADV210 are used.
In certain embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation described herein has less than about 60 colony forming units (CFU) , less than about 50 colony forming units, less than about 40 colony forming units, or less than about 30 colony forming units of microbial agents per gram of formulation. In certain embodiments, the ophthalmic formulations described herein are formulated to be isotonic with the eye.
Endotoxins
An additional aspect of the sterilization process is the removal of by-products from the killing of microorganisms (hereinafter, “ Product” ) . The process of depyrogenation removes pyrogens from the sample. Pyrogens are endotoxins or exotoxins which induce an immune response. An example of an endotoxin is the lipopolysaccharide (LPS) molecule found in the cell wall of gram-negative bacteria. While sterilization procedures such as autoclaving or treatment with ethylene oxide kill the bacteria, the LPS residue induces a proinflammatory immune response, such as septic shock. Because the molecular size of endotoxins can vary widely, the presence of endotoxins is expressed in “endotoxin units” (EU) . One EU is equivalent to 100 picograms of E. coli LPS. Humans can develop a response to as little as 5 EU/kg of body weight. The bioburden (e.g., microbial limit) and/or sterility (e.g., endotoxin level) is expressed in any units as recognized in the art. In certain embodiments, ophthalmic compositions described herein contain lower endotoxin levels (e.g. < 4 EU/kg of body weight of a subject) when compared to conventionally acceptable endotoxin levels (e.g., 5 EU/kg of body weight of a subject) . In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/kg of body weight of a subject. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 4 EU/kg of body weight of a subject. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 3  EU/kg of body weight of a subject. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 2 EU/kg of body weight of a subject.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/kg of formulation. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 4 EU/kg of formulation. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 3 EU/kg of formulation. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/kg Product. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 1 EU/kg Product. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 0.2 EU/kg Product. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/g of unit or Product. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 4 EU/g of unit or Product. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 3 EU/g of unit or Product. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 5 EU/mg of unit or Product. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 4 EU/mg of unit or Product. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 3 EU/mg of unit or Product. In certain embodiments, ophthalmic formulations described herein contain from about 1 to about 5 EU/mL of formulation. In certain embodiments, ophthalmic formulations described herein contain from about 2 to about 5 EU/mL of formulation, from about 3 to about 5 EU/mL of formulation, or from about 4 to about 5 EU/mL of formulation.
In certain embodiments, ophthalmic compositions described herein contain lower endotoxin levels (e.g. < 0.5 EU/mL of formulation) when compared to conventionally acceptable endotoxin levels (e.g., 0.5 EU/mL of formulation) . In some embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 0.5 EU/mL of formulation. In other embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 0.4 EU/mL of formulation. In additional embodiments, the ophthalmic formulation has less than about 0.2 EU/mL of formulation.
Pyrogen detection, by way of example only, is performed by several methods. Suitable tests for sterility include tests described in United States Pharmacopoeia (USP) <71> Sterility Tests (23rd edition, 1995) . The rabbit pyrogen test and the Limulus amebocyte lysate test are both specified in the United States Pharmacopeia Chapters <85> and <151> (USP23/NF 18, Biological Tests, The United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Rockville, MD, 1995) . Alternative pyrogen assays have been developed based upon the monocyte activation-cytokine assay. Uniform cell lines suitable for quality control applications have been developed and have demonstrated the ability to detect pyrogenicity in samples that have passed the rabbit pyrogen  test and the Limulus amebocyte lysate test (Taktak et al, J. Pharm. Pharmacol. (1990) , 43: 578-82) . In an additional embodiment, the ophthalmic formulation is subject to depyrogenation. In a further embodiment, the process for the manufacture of the ophthalmic formulation comprises testing the formulation for pyrogenicity. In certain embodiments, the formulations described herein are substantially free of pyrogens.
Ophthalmic Gel Composition
Gels have been defined in various ways. For example, the United States Pharmacopoeia defines gels as semisolid systems consisting of either suspensions made up of small inorganic particles or large organic molecules interpenetrated by a liquid. Gels include a single-phase or a two-phase system. A single-phase gel consists of organic macromolecules distributed uniformly throughout a liquid in such a manner that no apparent boundaries exist between the dispersed macromolecules and the liquid. Some single-phase gels are prepared from synthetic macromolecules (e.g., carbomer) or from natural gums, (e.g., tragacanth) . In some embodiments, single-phase gels are generally aqueous, but will also be made using alcohols and oils. Two-phase gels consist of a network of small discrete particles.
Gels can also be classified as being hydrophobic or hydrophilic. In certain embodiments, the base of a non-limiting example of a hydrophobic gel includes a liquid paraffin with polyethylene or fatty oils gelled with colloidal silica, or aluminum or zinc soaps. In contrast, the base of a non-limiting example of a hydrophilic gel includes water, glycerol, or propylene glycol gelled with a suitable gelling agent (e.g., tragacanth, starch, cellulose derivatives, carboxyvinylpolymers, and magnesium-aluminum silicates) . In certain embodiments, the rheology of the compositions disclosed herein is pseudo plastic, plastic, thixotropic, or dilatant.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition is an ophthalmic gel, and wherein the ophthalmically acceptable carrier comprises water and at least one viscosity-enhancing agent. In some embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing agent is selected from cellulose-based polymers, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene triblock copolymers, dextran-based polymers, polyvinyl alcohol, dextrin, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyalkylene glycols, chitosan, collagen, gelatin, hyaluronic acid, or combinations thereof.
In some embodiment, the ophthalmic gel composition described herein is a semi-solid or id in a gelled state before it is topically administered (e.g. at room temperature) . For example, suitable viscosity-enhancing agents for such gels include by way of example only, gelling agents and suspending agents. In one embodiment, the enhanced viscosity formulation does not include  a buffer. In other embodiments, the enhanced viscosity formulation includes a pharmaceutically acceptable buffer. Sodium chloride or other tonicity agents are optionally used to adjust tonicity, if necessary.
By way of example only, the ophthalmically acceptable viscosity agent includes hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carboxymethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, sodium chondroitin sulfate, sodium hyaluronate. Other viscosity enhancing agents compatible with the targeted ocular site include, but are not limited to, acacia (gum arabic) , agar, aluminum magnesium silicate, sodium alginate, sodium stearate, bladderwrack, bentonite, carbomer, carrageenan, Carbopol, xanthan, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose (MCC) , ceratonia, chitin, carboxymethylated chitosan, chondrus, dextrose, furcellaran, gelatin, Ghatti gum, guar gum, hectorite, lactose, sucrose, maltodextrin, mannitol, sorbitol, honey, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, sterculia gum, xanthum gum, gum tragacanth, ethyl cellulose, ethylhydroxyethyl cellulose, ethylmethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxyethylmethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, poly (hydroxyethyl methacrylate) , oxypolygelatin, pectin, polygeline, povidone, propylene carbonate, methyl vinyl ether/maleic anhydride copolymer (PVM/MA) , poly (methoxyethyl methacrylate) , poly (methoxyethoxyethyl methacrylate) , hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose (HPMC) , sodium carboxymethyl-cellulose (CMC) , silicon dioxide, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP: povidone) , 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000029
 (dextrose, maltodextrin and sucralose) or combinations thereof. In specific embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing excipient is a combination of MCC and CMC. In another embodiment, the viscosity-enhancing agent is a combination of carboxymethylated chitosan, or chitin, and alginate. The combination of chitin and alginate with the ophthalmic agents disclosed herein acts as a controlled release formulation, restricting the diffusion of the ophthalmic agents from the formulation. Moreover, the combination of carboxymethylated chitosan and alginate is optionally used to assist in increasing the permeability of the ophthalmic agents in the eye.
In some embodiments is an enhanced viscosity formulation, comprising from about 0.1 mM and about 100 mM of an ophthalmic agent, a pharmaceutically acceptable viscosity agent, and water for injection, the concentration of the viscosity agent in the water being sufficient to provide a enhanced viscosity formulation with a final viscosity from about 100 to about 100,000 cP. In certain embodiments, the viscosity of the gel is in the range from about 100 to about 50,000 cP, about 100 cP to about 1,000 cP, about 500 cP to about 1500 cP, about 1000 cP to  about 3000 cP, about 2000 cP to about 8,000 cP, about 4,000 cP to about 50,000 cP, about 10,000 cP to about 500,000 cP, about 15,000 cP to about 1,000,000 cP. In other embodiments, when an even more viscous medium is desired, the biocompatible gel comprises at least about 35%, at least about 45%, at least about 55%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, or even at least about 80%or so by weight of the ophthalmic agent. In highly concentrated samples, the biocompatible enhanced viscosity formulation comprises at least about 25%, at least about 35%, at least about 45%, at least about 55%, at least about 65%, at least about 75%, at least about 85%, at least about 90%or at least about 95%or more by weight of the ophthalmic agent.
In one embodiment, the pharmaceutically acceptable enhanced viscosity ophthalmically acceptable formulation comprises at least one ophthalmic agent and at least one gelling agent. Suitable gelling agents for use in preparation of the gel formulation include, but are not limited to, celluloses, cellulose derivatives, cellulose ethers (e.g., carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, methylcellulose) , guar gum, xanthan gum, locust bean gum, alginates (e.g., alginic acid) , silicates, starch, tragacanth, carboxyvinyl polymers, carrageenan, paraffin, petrolatum and any combinations or mixtures thereof. In some other embodiments, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000030
is utilized as the gelling agent. In certain embodiments, the viscosity enhancing agents described herein are also utilized as the gelling agent for the gel formulations presented herein.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic gel composition described herein is an in situ gel formulation. In some instances, the in situ gel formation is based on increased pre-corneal residence time of the ophthalmic composition which improves ocular bioavailability, corneal mucoadhesion, lysosomal interaction and ionic gelation, improved corneal absorption, thermal gelation, or a combination thereof. In some instances, the in situ gel formulation is activated by pH, temperature, ion, UV, or solvent exchange.
In some instances, the ophthalmic gel composition comprises one or more geling agents. In some instances, the geling agent includes, but is not limited to, poloxamer (e.g. Poloxamer 407) , tetronics, ethyl (hydroxyethyl) cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP) , carbopol (e.g. Carbopol 1342P NF, Carbopol 980 NF) , alginates (e.g. low acetyl gellan gum 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000031
) , gellan, hyaluronic acid, pluronics (e.g. Pluronic F-127) , chitosan, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) , polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) , dextran, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) ,  hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC) , methylcellulose (MC) , thiolated xyloglucan, polymethacrilic acid (PMMA) , polyethylene glycol (PEG) , pseudolatexes, xyloglucans, or combinations thereof.
In some instances, the in situ gel formation further comprises a permeation enhancer. In some instances, the permeation enhancer includes surfactants (e.g. non-ionic surfactants) , benzalkonium chloride, EDTA, surface-active heteroglycosides, calcium chelators, hydroxyl propyl beta cyclodextrin (HP beta CD) , bile salts, and the like.
In some embodiments, other gel formulations are useful depending upon the particular ophthalmic agent, other pharmaceutical agent or excipients/additives used, and as such are considered to fall within the scope of the present disclosure. For example, other commercially-available glycerin-based gels, glycerin-derived compounds, conjugated, or crosslinked gels, matrices, hydrogels, and polymers, as well as gelatins and their derivatives, alginates, and alginate-based gels, and even various native and synthetic hydrogel and hydrogel-derived compounds are all expected to be useful in the ophthalmic agent formulations described herein. In some embodiments, ophthalmically acceptable gels include, but are not limited to, alginate hydrogels 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000032
 (ConvaTec, Princeton, N.J. ) , 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000033
Hydroactive Gel (ConvaTec) , Nu-
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000034
(Johnson &Johnson Medical, Arlington, Tex. ) ; 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000035
 (V) Acemannan Hydrogel (Carrington Laboratories, Inc., Irving, Tex. ) ; glycerin gels 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000036
Hydrogel (Swiss-American Products, Inc., Dallas, Tex. ) and 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000037
Sterile (Johnson &Johnson) . In further embodiments, biodegradable biocompatible gels also represent compounds present in ophthalmically acceptable formulations disclosed and described herein.
In some embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing agent is a cellulose-based polymer selected from cellulose gum, alkylcellulose, hydroxyl-alkyl cellulose, hydroxyl-alkyl alkylcellulose, carboxy-alkyl cellulose, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing agent is hydroxyl-alkyl alkylcellulose. In some embodiment, the viscosity-enhancing agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose.
In certain embodiments, the enhanced viscosity formulation is characterized by a phase transition between room temperature and body temperature (including an individual with a serious fever, e.g., up to about 42 ℃) . In some embodiments, the phase transition occurs at 1 ℃below body temperature, at 2 ℃ below body temperature, at 3 ℃ below body temperature, at 4 ℃ below body temperature, at 6 ℃ below body temperature, at 8 ℃ below body temperature, or at 10 ℃ below body temperature. In some embodiments, the phase transition occurs at about 15 ℃ below body temperature, at about 20 ℃ below body temperature or at about 25 ℃ below  body temperature. In specific embodiments, the gelation temperature (Tgel) of a formulation described herein is about 20 ℃, about 25 ℃, or about 30 ℃. In certain embodiments, the gelation temperature (Tgel) of a formulation described herein is about 35 ℃, or about 40 ℃. Included within the definition of body temperature is the body temperature of a healthy individual, or an unhealthy individual, including an individual with a fever (up to ~42 ℃) . In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions described herein are liquids at about room temperature and are administered at or about room temperature.
Copolymers polyoxypropylene and polyoxyethylene (e.g. polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene triblock copolymers) form thermosetting gels when incorporated into aqueous solutions. These polymers have the ability to change from the liquid state to the gel state at temperatures close to body temperature, therefore allowing useful formulations that are applied to the targeted ocular site. The liquid state-to-gel state phase transition is dependent on the polymer concentration and the ingredients in the solution.
In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer in any formulation described herein is about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, about 25%, about 30%, about 35%or about 40%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer in any formulation described herein is about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, about 15%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%, about 19%, about 20%, about 21%, about 22%, about 23%, about 24%or about 25%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 7.5%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 10%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 11%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 12%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 13%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 14%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 15%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of  thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 16%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 17%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 18%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 19%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 20%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 21%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 23%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thermosetting polymer (e.g., Poloxamer 407) in any formulation described herein is about 25%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thickening agent (e.g., a gelling agent) in any formulation described herein is about 1%, about 5%, about 10%, or about 15%of the total weight of the formulation. In some embodiments, the amount of thickening agent (e.g., a gelling agent) in any formulation described herein is about 0.5%, about 1%, about 1.5%, about 2%, about 2.5%, about 3%, about 3.5%, about 4%, about 4.5%, or about 5%of the total weight of the formulation.
In an alternative embodiment, the thermogel is a PEG-PLGA-PEG triblock copolymer (Jeong etal, Nature (1997) , 388: 860-2; Jeong etal, J. Control. Release (2000) , 63: 155-63; Jeong etal, Adv. Drug Delivery Rev. (2002) , 54: 37-51) . The polymer exhibits sol-gel behavior over a concentration of about 5%w/w to about 40%w/w. Depending on the properties desired, the lactide/glycolide molar ratio in the PLGA copolymer ranges from about 1: 1 to about 20: 1. The resulting coploymers are soluble in water and form a free-flowing liquid at room temperature, but form a hydrogel at body temperature. A commercially available PEG-PLGA-PEG triblock copolymer is RESOMER RGP t50106 manufactured by Boehringer Ingelheim. This material is composed of a PLGA copolymer of 50: 50 poly (DL-lactide-co-glycolide) and is 10%w/w of PEG and has a molecular weight of about 6000.
Additional biodegradable thermoplastic polyesters include 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000038
 (provided by Atrix Laboratories, Inc. ) and/or those disclosed, e.g., in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,324,519; 4,938,763; 5,702,716; 5,744,153; and 5,990,194; wherein the suitable biodegradable thermoplastic polyester  is disclosed as a thermoplastic polymer. Examples of suitable biodegradable thermoplastic polyesters include polylactides, polyglycolides, polycaprolactones, copolymers thereof, terpolymers thereof, and any combinations thereof. In some such embodiments, the suitable biodegradable thermoplastic polyester is a polylactide, a polyglycolide, a copolymer thereof, a terpolymer thereof, or a combination thereof. In one embodiment, the biodegradable thermoplastic polyester is 50/50 poly (DL-lactide-co-glycolide) having a carboxy terminal group; is present in about 30 wt. %to about 40 wt. %of the composition; and has an average molecular weight of about 23,000 to about 45,000. Alternatively, in another embodiment, the biodegradable thermoplastic polyester is 75/25 poly (DL-lactide-co-glycolide) without a carboxy terminal group; is present in about 40 wt. %to about 50 wt. %of the composition; and has an average molecular weight of about 15,000 to about 24,000. In further or alternative embodiments, the terminal groups of the poly (DL-lactide-co-glycolide) are either hydroxyl, carboxyl, or ester depending upon the method of polymerization. Polycondensation of lactic or glycolic acid provides a polymer with terminal hydroxyl and carboxyl groups. Ring-opening polymerization of the cyclic lactide or glycolide monomers with water, lactic acid, or glycolic acid provides polymers with the same terminal groups. However, ring-opening of the cyclic monomers with a monofunctional alcohol such as methanol, ethanol, or 1-dodecanol provides a polymer with one hydroxyl group and one ester terminal groups. Ring-opening polymerization of the cyclic monomers with a diol such as 1, 6-hexanediol or polyethylene glycol provides a polymer with only hydroxyl terminal groups.
Since the polymer systems of thermosetting gels dissolve more completely at reduced temperatures, methods of solubilization include adding the required amount of polymer to the amount of water to be used at reduced temperatures. Generally after wetting the polymer by shaking, the mixture is capped and placed in a cold chamber or in a thermostatic container at about 0-10 ℃ in order to dissolve the polymer. The mixture is stirred or shaken to bring about a more rapid dissolution of the thermosetting gel polymer. The ophthalmic agent and various additives such as buffers, salts, and preservatives are subsequently added and dissolved. In some instances the pharmaceutically agent is suspended if it is insoluble in water. The pH is modulated by the addition of appropriate buffering agents.
Ophthalmic Ointment Composition
An ointment is a homogeneous, viscous, semi-solid preparation, most commonly a greasy, thick oil (e.g. oil 80%-water 20%) with a high viscosity, intended for external application to the  skin or mucous membranes. Ointments have a Water number that defines the maximum amount of water that it can contain. They are used as emollients or for the application of active ingredients to the skin for protective, therapeutic, or prophylactic purposes and where a degree of occlusion is desired. Ointments are used topically on a variety of body surfaces. These include the skin and the mucous membranes of the eye (an eye ointment) , vulva, anus, and nose
The vehicle of an ointment is known as the ointment base. The choice of a base depends upon the clinical indication for the ointment. The different types of ointment bases are: hydrocarbon bases, e.g. hard paraffin, soft paraffin, microcrystalline wax and ceresine; absorption bases, e.g. wool fat, beeswax; water soluble bases, e.g. macrogols 200, 300, 400; emulsifying bases, e.g. emulsifying wax, cetrimide; vegetable oils, e.g. olive oil, coconut oil, sesame oil, almond oil and peanut oil.
Ointments are formulated using hydrophobic, hydrophilic, or water-emulsifying bases to provide preparations that are immiscible, miscible, or emulsifiable with skin secretions. They can also be derived from hydrocarbon (fatty) , absorption, water-removable, or water-soluble bases. The active agents are dispersed in the base, and later they get divided after the drug penetration into the target sites (e.g. membranes, skins, etc. ) .
The present disclosure recognizes that it is sometimes difficult to incorporate into the ointment a drug of low concentration with sufficient dose-to-dose uniformity for effectively treating a disorder or disease. In some embodiments, poly (ethylene-glycols) , polyethoxylated castor oils (
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000039
EL) , alcohols having 12 to 20 carbon atoms or a mixture of two or more of said components are effective excipients for dispersing and/or dissolving effective amounts of ophthalmic drugs, in particular of ascomycins and staurosporine derivatives, in an ointment base, in particular in an ointment base substantially comprising oleaginous and hydrocarbon components, and that the resulting ointments are excellently tolerated by the skin and by ocular tissue.
The present disclosure further recognizes that ophthalmic drugs, such as a a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof, incorporated in the ointment compositions describes herein can effectively target the choroid and/or retina in a patient when the compositions are topically administered to the ocular surface, in particular to the sclera of said patient. In some embodiments, an ophthalmic ointment composition includes an ophthalmic drug, an ointment base and an agent for dispersing and/or dissolving said drug in the ointment base, selected from a poly (ethylene-glycol) , a  polyethoxylated castor oil, an alcohol having 12 to 20 carbon atoms and a mixture of two or more of said components.
In some embodiments, the ointment bases include ophthalmically acceptable oil and fat bases, such as natural wax e.g. white and yellow bees wax, carnauba wax, wool wax (wool fat) , purified lanolin, anhydrous lanolin; petroleum wax e.g. hard paraffin, microcrystalline wax; hydrocarbons e.g. liquid paraffin, white and yellow soft paraffin, white petrolatum, yellow petrolatum; or combinations thereof.
The above mentioned oil and fat bases are described in more detail, for instance, in the British Pharmacopoeia, Edition 2001, or the European Pharmacopoeia, 3rd Edition.
The ointment base may be present in amounts of about 50 to about 95, preferably of 70 to 90%by weight based on the total weight of the composition.
A preferred ointment base comprises a combination of one or more of one or more natural waxes like those indicated above, preferably wool wax (wool fat) , and one or more hydrocarbons like those indicated above, preferably a soft paraffin or a petrolatum, more preferably in combination with liquid paraffin.
A special embodiment of the aforementioned ointment base comprises e.g. 5 to 17 parts by weight of wool fat, and 50 to 65 parts by weight of white petrolatum as well as 20 to 30 parts by weight of liquid paraffin.
The agent for dispersing and/or dissolving the ophthalmic drug in the ointment base may be selected from a poly (ethylene-glycol) , a polyethoxylated castor oil, an alcohol having 12 to 20 carbon atoms and a mixture of two or more of said components. The agent is preferably used in amounts of 1 to 20 percent, more preferably 1 to 10 percent by weight of the entire semisolid ophthalmic composition.
Alcohols having 12 to 20 carbon atoms include particularly stearyl alcohol (C18H37OH) , cetyl alcohol (C 16H 33OH) and mixtures thereof. Preferred are so-called cetostearyl alcohols, mixtures of solid alcohols substantially consisting of stearyl and cetyl alcohol and preferably comprising not less than 40 percent by weight of stearyl alcohol and a sum of stearyl alcohol and cetyl alcohol amounting to at least 90 percent by weight, and compositions comprising not less than 80 percent by weight of cetylstearyl alcohol and an emulsifier, in particular sodium cetostearyl sulfate and/or sodium lauryl sulfate, preferably in amounts not less than 7 percent by weight of emulsifier.
Polyethoxylated castor oils are reaction products of natural or hydrogenated castor oils and ethylene glycol. Such products may be obtained in known manner, e.g. by reaction of a natural or hydrogenated castor oil or fractions thereof with ethylene oxide, e.g. in a molar ratio of from about 1: 30 to about 1: 60, with optional removal of free polyethylene glycol components from the product, e.g. in accordance with the methods disclosed in German Auslegeschriften 1,182, 388 and 1, 518, 819. Especially suitable and preferred is a product commercially available under the trade name 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000040
having a molecular weight (by steam osmometry) =ca. 1630, a saponification no. =ca. 65-70, an acid no. =ca. 2, an iodine no. =ca. 28-32 and an nD 25=ca. 1.471. Also suitable for use in this category is, for instance, 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000041
HCO-60, a reaction product of hydrogenated castor oil and ethylene oxide exhibiting the following characteristics: acid no. =ca. 0.3; saponification no. =ca. 47.4; hydroxy value=ca. 42.5. pH (5%) =ca. 4.6; Color APHA=ca. 40; m. p. =ca. 36.0℃.; Freezing point=ca. 32.4℃.; H2O content (%, KF) =ca. 0.03.
Poly (ethylene-glycols) are used in some embodiments as the agent for dispersing and/or dissolving the ophthalmic drug in the ointment base according to the present disclosure. Suitable poly (ethylene-glycol) sare typically mixtures of polymeric compounds of the general formula H- (OCH2-CH2) nOH, wherein the index n may typically range from 4 to 230 and the mean molecular weight from about 200 to about 10000. Preferably n is a number from about 6 to about 22 and the mean molecular weight between about 300 and about 1000, more preferably n ranges from about 6 to about 13 and the mean molecular weight from about 300 to about 600, most preferably n has a value of about 8.5 to about 9 and the relative molecular weight is about 400. Suitable poly (ethylene-glycols) are readily available commercially, for example poly (ethylene-glycols) having a mean molecular weight of about 200, 300, 400, 600, 1000, 1500, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000, 8000 and 10000.
The poly (ethylene-glycols) , in particular the preferred types described in the foregoing paragraph, are preferably used in amounts of 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5 percent by weight of the entire semisolid ophthalmic composition.
An especially preferred embodiment of the compositions according to the instant disclosure comprises an agent for dispersing and/or dissolving of the drug in the ointment base which is selected from a poly (ethylene-glycol) , a polyethoxylated castor oil and preferably a mixture of said components.
Gel/Ointment Viscosity
In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 10,000 to about 300,000 cps at about 20 ℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 15,000 to about 200,000 cps at about 20 ℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 50,000 to about 150,000 cps at about 20℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 70,000 to about 130,000 cps at about 20 ℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1. In some embodiments, the composition has a Brookfield RVDV viscosity of from about 90,000 to about 110,000 cps at about 20 ℃ and sheer rate of 1s -1.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic gel formulation contains a viscosity enhancing agent sufficient to provide a viscosity of between about 500 and 1,000,000 centipoise, between about 750 and 1,000,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 1,000,000 centipoise; between about 1000 and 400,000 centipoise; between about 2000 and 100,000 centipoise; between about 3000 and 50,000 centipoise; between about 4000 and 25,000 centipoise; between about 5000 and 20,000 centipoise; or between about 6000 and 15,000 centipoise. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic gel formulation contains a viscosity enhancing agent sufficient to provide a viscosity of between about 50,0000 and 1,000,000 centipoise.
In some embodiments, the compositions described herein are low viscosity compositions at body temperature. In some embodiments, low viscosity compositions contain from about 1%to about 10%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, low viscosity compositions contain from about 2%to about 10%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, low viscosity compositions contain from about 5%to about 10%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, low viscosity compositions are substantially free of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, a low viscosity ophthalmic agent composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 100 cP to about 10,000 cP. In some embodiments, a low viscosity ophthalmic agent composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 500 cP to about 10,000 cP. In some embodiments, a low viscosity ophthalmic agent composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 1000 cP to about 10,000 cP.
In some embodiments, the compositions described herein are viscous compositions at body temperature. In some embodiments, viscous compositions contain from about 10%to about 25%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, the viscous compositions contain from about 14%to about 22%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, the viscous compositions contain from about 15%to about 21%of a viscosity enhancing agent (e.g., gelling components such as polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers) . In some embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 100,000 cP to about 1,000,000 cP. In some embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 150,000 cP to about 500,000 cP. In some embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition described herein provides an apparent viscosity of from about 250,000 cP to about 500,000 cP. In some of such embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition is a liquid at room temperature and gels at about between room temperature and body temperature (including an individual with a serious fever, e.g., up to about 42 ℃) . In some embodiments, a viscous ophthalmic composition is administered as monotherapy for treatment of an ophthalmic disease or condition described herein.
In some embodiments, the viscosity of the gel formulations presented herein is measured by any means described. For example, in some embodiments, an LVDV-II+CP Cone Plate Viscometer and a Cone Spindle CPE-40 is used to calculate the viscosity of the gel formulation described herein. In other embodiments, a Brookfield (spindle and cup) viscometer is used to calculate the viscosity of the gel formulation described herein. In some embodiments, the viscosity ranges referred to herein are measured at room temperature. In other embodiments, the viscosity ranges referred to herein are measured at body temperature (e.g., at the average body temperature of a healthy human) .
Gel/Ointment Dose-To-Dose Uniformity
Typical ophthalmic gels are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops. For example, a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic gel may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient. Furthermore, typical ophthalmic ointments are packaged in tubes or other squeezable containers with a dispensing nozzle through which strips of the ointment are delivered. For example, a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic ointment may include a single strip, or multiple strips into  the eyes of the patient. In some embodiments, one dose of the ophthalmic gel described herein is one drop of the gel composition from the eye drop bottle. In some embodiments, one dose of the ophthalmic ointment is one strip of the ointment composition dispensed through the nozzle of a dispersing tube.
In some cases, described herein include ophthalmic gel compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
In some cases, described herein include ophthalmic ointment compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 50%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 40%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 30%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 20%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 10%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 5%.
In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 10 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 8 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 5 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 3 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 2 consecutive doses.
A nonsettling formulation should not require shaking to disperse drug uniformly. A “no-shake” formulation is potentially advantageous over formulations that require shaking for the simple reason that patients’ shaking behavior is a major source of variability in the amount of  drug dosed. It has been reported that patients often times do not or forget to shake their ophthalmic compositions that requires shaking before administering a dose, despite the instructions to shake that were clearly marked on the label. On the other hand, even for those patients who do shake the product, it is normally not possible to determine whether the shaking is adequate in intensity and/or duration to render the product uniform. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic gel compositions and ophthalmic ointment compositions described herein are “no-shake” formulations that maintained the dose-to-dose uniformity described herein.
To evaluate the dose-to-dose uniformity, drop bottles or tubes containing the ophthalmic aqueous compositions, the ophthalmic gel compositions, or ophthalmic ointment compositions are stored upright for a minimum of 12 hours prior to the start of the test. To simulate the recommended dosing of these products, predetermined number of drops or strips are dispensed from each commercial bottles or tubes at predetermined time intervals for an extended period of time or until no product was left in the bottle or tube. All drops and strips are dispensed into tared glass vials, capped, and stored at room temperature until analysis.
In some embodiments, a milling process is used to reduce the size of a solid material to form particles in the micrometer to nanometer size range. Dry and wet milling processes such as jet milling, cryo-milling, ball milling, media milling, and homogenization are known and can be used in methods described herein. Generally, in a wet milling process, a suspension of the material to be used as the nanoparticle is mixed with milling media with or without excipients to reduce particle size. Dry milling is a process wherein the material to be used as the nanoparticle is mixed with milling media with or without excipients to reduce particle size. In a cryo-milling process, a suspension of the material to be used as the nanoparticle is mixed with milling media with or without excipients under cooled temperatures. Any suitable grinding medium can be used for milling. In some embodiments, a ceramic and/or polymeric material and/or a metal can be used. Examples of suitable materials may include zirconium oxide, silicon carbide, silicon oxide, silicon nitride, zirconium silicate, yttrium oxide, glass, alumina, alpha-alumina, aluminum oxide, polystyrene, poly (methyl methacrylate) , titanium, steel. A grinding medium may have any suitable size. For example, the grinding medium may have an average diameter of at least about 0.1 mm, at least about 0.2 mm, at least about 0.5 mm, at least about 0.8 mm, at least about 1 mm, at least about 2 mm, or at least about 5 mm. In some cases, the grinding medium may have an average diameter of less than or equal to about 5 mm, less than or equal to about 2 mm, less than or equal to about 1 mm, less than or equal to about 0.8, less than or equal to about 0.5 mm, or  less than or equal to about 0.2 mm. Combinations of the above-referenced ranges are also possible (e.g., an average diameter of at least about 0.5 millimeters and less than or equal to about 1 mm) . Other ranges are also possible.
Any suitable solvent may be used for milling. The choice of solvent may depend on factors such as the solid material being milled, the particular type of stabilizer/mucus penetrating agent being used (e.g., one that may render the particle mucus penetrating) , the grinding material be used, among other factors. Suitable solvents may be ones that do not substantially dissolve the solid material or the grinding material, but dissolve the stabilizer/mucus penetrating agent to a suitable degree. Non-limiting examples of solvents may include water, buffered solutions, other aqueous solutions, alcohols (e.g., ethanol, methanol, butanol) , and mixtures thereof that may optionally include other components such as pharmaceutical excipients, polymers, pharmaceutical agents, salts, preservative agents, viscosity modifiers, tonicity modifier, taste masking agents, antioxidants, pH modifier, and other pharmaceutical excipients. In other embodiments, an organic solvent can be used. A pharmaceutical agent may have any suitable solubility in these or other solvents, such as solubility in one or more of the ranges described above for aqueous solubility or for solubility in a coating solution.
By way of example only, the ophthalmically acceptable viscosity agent includes hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carboxymethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, sodium chondroitin sulfate, sodium hyaluronate. Other viscosity enhancing agents compatible with the targeted ocular site include, but are not limited to, acacia (gum arabic) , agar, aluminum magnesium silicate, sodium alginate, sodium stearate, bladderwrack, bentonite, carbomer, carrageenan, Carbopol, xanthan, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose (MCC) , ceratonia, chitin, carboxymethylated chitosan, chondrus, dextrose, furcellaran, gelatin, Ghatti gum, guar gum, hectorite, lactose, sucrose, maltodextrin, mannitol, sorbitol, honey, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, sterculia gum, xanthum gum, gum tragacanth, ethyl cellulose, ethylhydroxyethyl cellulose, ethylmethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxyethylmethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, poly (hydroxyethyl methacrylate) , oxypolygelatin, pectin, polygeline, povidone, propylene carbonate, methyl vinyl ether/maleic anhydride copolymer (PVM/MA) , poly (methoxyethyl methacrylate) , poly (methoxyethoxyethyl methacrylate) , hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose (HPMC) , sodium carboxymethyl-cellulose (CMC) , silicon dioxide, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP: povidone) , 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000042
 (dextrose, maltodextrin and sucralose)  or combinations thereof. In specific embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing excipient is a combination of MCC and CMC. In another embodiment, the viscosity-enhancing agent is a combination of carboxymethylated chitosan, or chitin, and alginate. The combination of chitin and alginate with the ophthalmic agents disclosed herein acts as a controlled release formulation, restricting the diffusion of the ophthalmic agents from the formulation. Moreover, the combination of carboxymethylated chitosan and alginate is optionally used to assist in increasing the permeability of the ophthalmic agents in the eye.
In some embodiments is an enhanced viscosity formulation, comprising from about 0.1 mM and about 100 mM of an ophthalmic agent, a pharmaceutically acceptable viscosity agent, and water for injection, the concentration of the viscosity agent in the water being sufficient to provide a enhanced viscosity formulation with a final viscosity from about 100 to about 100,000 cP. In certain embodiments, the viscosity of the gel is in the range from about 100 to about 50,000 cP, about 100 cP to about 1,000 cP, about 500 cP to about 1500 cP, about 1000 cP to about 3000 cP, about 2000 cP to about 8,000 cP, about 4,000 cP to about 50,000 cP, about 10,000 cP to about 500,000 cP, about 15,000 cP to about 1,000,000 cP. In other embodiments, when an even more viscous medium is desired, the biocompatible gel comprises at least about 35%, at least about 45%, at least about 55%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, or even at least about 80%or so by weight of the ophthalmic agent. In highly concentrated samples, the biocompatible enhanced viscosity formulation comprises at least about 25%, at least about 35%, at least about 45%, at least about 55%, at least about 65%, at least about 75%, at least about 85%, at least about 90%or at least about 95%or more by weight of the ophthalmic agent.
In one embodiment, the pharmaceutically acceptable enhanced viscosity ophthalmically acceptable formulation comprises at least one ophthalmic agent and at least one gelling agent. Suitable gelling agents for use in preparation of the formulation include, but are not limited to, celluloses, cellulose derivatives, cellulose ethers (e.g., carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, methylcellulose) , guar gum, xanthan gum, locust bean gum, alginates (e.g., alginic acid) , silicates, starch, tragacanth, carboxyvinyl polymers, carrageenan, paraffin, petrolatum and any combinations or mixtures thereof. In some other embodiments, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000043
is utilized as the gelling agent.
In some instances, the ophthalmic composition comprises one or more gelling agents. In some instances, the geling agent includes, but is not limited to, poloxamer (e.g. Poloxamer 407) ,  tetronics, ethyl (hydroxyethyl) cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP) , carbopol (e.g. Carbopol 1342P NF, Carbopol 980 NF) , alginates (e.g. low acetyl gellan gum
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000044
) , gellan, hyaluronic acid, pluronics (e.g. Pluronic F-127) , chitosan, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) , polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) , dextran, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) , hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC) , methylcellulose (MC) , thiolated xyloglucan, polymethacrilic acid (PMMA) , polyethylene glycol (PEG) , pseudolatexes, xyloglucans, or combinations thereof.
In some embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing agent is a cellulose-based polymer selected from cellulose gum, alkylcellulose, hydroxyl-alkyl cellulose, hydroxyl-alkyl alkylcellulose, carboxy-alkyl cellulose, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the viscosity-enhancing agent is hydroxyl-alkyl alkylcellulose. In some embodiment, the viscosity-enhancing agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose.
Dose-To-Dose Uniformity
Typical ophthalmic formulations are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops. For example, a single administration (i.e., a single dose) of an ophthalmic formulation may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient. In some embodiments, one dose of the ophthalmic formulation described herein is three drop sszof the composition from the eye drop bottle.
In some cases, described herein are ophthalmic compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
In some cases, described herein include ophthalmic ointment compositions which provide a dose-to-dose uniform concentrations. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does not present significant viarations of drug content from one dose to another. In some instances, the dose-to-dose uniform concentration does provide consistant drug content from one dose to another.
In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 50%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 40%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 30%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation  of less than 20%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 10%. In some embodiments, the composition has a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 5%.
In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 10 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 8 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 5 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 3 consecutive doses. In some embodiments, the dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation is based on 2 consecutive doses.
A nonsettling formulation should not require shaking to disperse drug uniformly. A “no-shake” formulation is potentially advantageous over formulations that require shaking for the simple reason that patients’ shaking behavior is a major source of variability in the amount of drug dosed. It has been reported that patients often times do not or forget to shake their ophthalmic compositions that requires shaking before administering a dose, despite the instructions to shake that were clearly marked on the label. On the other hand, even for those patients who do shake the product, it is normally not possible to determine whether the shaking is adequate in intensity and/or duration to render the product uniform. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic compositions described herein are “no-shake” formulations that maintained the dose-to-dose uniformity described herein. To evaluate the dose-to-dose uniformity, drop bottles or tubes containing the ophthalmic compositions are stored upright for a minimum of 12 hours prior to the start of the test. To simulate the recommended dosing of these products, predetermined number of drops or strips are dispensed from each commercial bottles or tubes at predetermined time intervals for an extended period of time or until no product was left in the bottle or tube. All drops and strips are dispensed into tared glass vials, capped, and stored at room temperature until analysis.
II. Methods of Use
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing a disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(i) a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000045
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and 
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration;
and wherein the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing a disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(i) fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000046
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension;
and wherein the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(i) fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000047
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of treating or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(i) a compound of Formula (I) :
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000048
or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic disorder or disease affects function, clarity, and/or structure of the lens of the eye. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic disorder or disease is wet macular degeneration, cataracts, presbyopia, nuclear sclerosis of the eye lens, Refsum disease, Smith-Lemli-Opitz syndrome (SLOS) , Schnyder crystalline corneal dystrophy (SCCD) , abetalipoproteinemia, familial hypobetalipoproteinemia, neovascularization, or cancer. In some embodiments, the neovascularization is corneal neovascularization, iris neovascularization, or choroidal neovascularization. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic disorder or disease is corneal neovascularization. In some embodiments, the subject has undergone a surgical procedure for treatment of the ophthalmic disorder or disease.
In some embodiments, about 0.005 mg/mLto about 5.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject. In some embodiments, about 0.01 mg/mL to about 4.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
In some embodiments, the composition is administered the subject once per day, twice per day, three times per day, or four times per day.
In some embodiments, the composition is administered the subject three times per day. In some embodiments, about 60 μL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
In some embodiments, the composition is administered the subject three times per day. In some embodiments, the composition is administered the subject four times per day.
In some embodiments, the administration is topical or by ophthalmic injection. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic injection is an intravitreous or subconjunctival injection.
In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject daily. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject once per day, twice per day, three times per day, or four times per day. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject once per day. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject three times per day.
In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of up to about 12 weeks. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of at least one week. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of at least two weeks. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of up to about 2 weeks. In some embodiments of the  methods provided herein, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to the subject for a period of one week, two weeks, 6 weeks, 12 weeks, 24 weeks, 48 weeks, or 52 weeks.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic aqueous formulations described herein are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops. For example, a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic aqueous formulation may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic gel formulations described herein are packaged in eye drop bottles and administered as drops. For example, a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic gel may include a single drop, two drops, three drops or more into the eyes of the patient. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic ointment formulations described herein are packaged in tubes or other squeezable containers with a dispensing nozzle through which strips of the ointment are delivered. For example, a single administration (i.e. a single dose) of an ophthalmic ointment may include a single strip, or multiple strips into the eyes of the patient. In some embodiments, one dose of the ophthalmic aqueous formulation described herein is one drop of the aqueous composition from the eye drop bottle. In some embodiments, one dose of the ophthalmic gel described herein is one drop of the gel composition from the eye drop bottle. In some embodiments, one dose of the ophthalmic ointment is one strip of the ointment composition dispensed through the nozzle of a dispersing tube.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic aqueous formulations are administered as follows The lower lid of the eye to be administered was pulled down and a predetermined amount of the aqueous formulation (e.g. 1-3 drops) is applied to the inside of the eyelid. The ophthalmic tip of the dispensing mechanism does not touch any surface to avoid contamination and/or injury.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic gel formulations are administered as follows The lower lid of the eye to be administered was pulled down and a predetermined amount of gel (e.g. 1-3 drops) is applied to the inside of the eyelid. The ophthalmic tip of the dispensing mechanism does not touch any surface to avoid contamination and/or injury.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic ointment formulations are administered as follows The lower lid of the eye to be administered was pulled down and a small amount of ointment (approximately 0.25 inches) was applied to the inside of the eyelid. The ophthalmic tip of the dispensing mechanism does not touch any surface to avoid contamination and/or injury.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition is administered at predetermined time intervals over an extended period of time. In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition is administered three times every day (i.e., three or four doses) . In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition is administered over 1 week, 2 weeks, 1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 6 moths, 1 year, 2 years, 3 years, 4 years, 5 years, 6 years, 7 years, 8 years, 9 years, 10 years, 11 years, or 12-15 years.
In some embodiments, the ophthalmic composition is administered in doses having a dose-to-dose ophthalmic agent concentration variation of less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 20%, less than 10%, or less than 5%.
The number of times a composition is administered to an individual in need thereof depends on the discretion of a medical professional, the disorder, the severity of the disorder, and the individual’s response to the formulation. In some embodiments, a composition disclosed herein is administered once to an individual in need thereof with a mild acute condition. In some embodiments, a composition disclosed herein is administered more than once to an individual in need thereof with a moderate or severe acute condition. In the case wherein the patient’s condition does not improve, upon the doctor’s discretion the administration of an ophthalmic agent may be administered chronically, that is, for an extended period of time, including throughout the duration of the patient’s life in order to ameliorate or otherwise control or limit the symptoms of the patient’s disease or condition.
In the case wherein the patient’s condition does not improve, upon the doctor’s discretion the administration of the ophthalmic agent may be administered chronically, that is, for an extended period of time, including throughout the duration of the patient’s life in order to ameliorate or otherwise control or limit the symptoms of the patient’s disease or condition.
In the case wherein the patient’s status does improve, upon the doctor’s discretion the administration of the ophthalmic agent may be given continuously; alternatively, the dose of drug being administered may be temporarily reduced or temporarily suspended for a certain length of time (i.e., a “drug holiday” ) . The length of the drug holiday varies between 2 days and 1 year, including by way of example only, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 7 days, 10 days, 12 days, 15 days, 20 days, 28 days, 35 days, 50 days, 70 days, 100 days, 120 days, 150 days, 180 days, 200 days, 250 days, 280 days, 300 days, 320 days, 350 days, and 365 days. The dose reduction during a drug holiday may be from 10%-100%, including by way of example only 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, and 100%.
Once improvement of the patient's ophthalmic conditions has occurred, a maintenance ophthalmic agent dose is administered if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or the frequency of administration, or both, is optionally reduced, as a function of the symptoms, to a level at which the improved disease, disorder or condition is retained. In certain embodiments, patients require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of symptoms.
The amount of ophthalmic agent that will correspond to such an amount will vary depending upon factors such as the particular compound, disease condition and its severity, according to the particular circumstances surrounding the case, including, e.g., the specific ophthalmic agent being administered, the route of administration, the condition being treated, the target area being treated, and the subject or host  being treated. The desired dose is presented in a single dose or as divided doses administered simultaneously (or over a short period of time) or at appropriate intervals.
In some embodiments, the initial administration is a particular ophthalmic agent and the subsequent administration a different formulation or ophthalmic agent.
pH Adjusters
Sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate (NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O) and di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O) are used as pH adjusters. Other alternatives include maleate, citrate etc. Wetting agents include cationic surfactant or anionic surfactant; and suspending agents include HPMC.
Suspensions
Defined as preparations containing finely divided drug particles (the suspensoid) distributed somewhat unformly throughout a vehicle in which the drug exhibits a minimum degree of solubility. A suspension is the state of a drug when its particles are mixed with but undissolved in a fluid or solid.
Polyoxyl 15-Hydroxystearate (
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000049
HS 15)
Polyoxyl 15-Hydroxystearate is a new kind of excipient with high solubilization ability and low histamine release, low hemolytic activity and excellent physiological tolerance, which is approved for injection. Its safety is support by listed products and clinical research data.
HPMC
Hypromellose (HPMC E4M) is widely used as polymer suspending agent for suspension formulation. Other commercial grade products with different viscosities and different degrees of substitution may also be used.
Sodium Thiosulfate
Sodium thiosulfate as an antioxidant, the aqueous solution is neutral or slightly alkaline, precipitation when meeting acid, suitable for alkaline drugs..
Dosing
In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein are administered administered for about 1 day, about 2 days, about 3 days, about 4 days, about 5 days, about 6 days, about 7 days, about 8 days, about 9 days, about 10 days, about 11 days, about 12 days, about 13 days, about 14 days, about 15 days, about 16 days, about 17 days, about 18 days, about 19 days, about 20 days, about 21 days, about 22 days, about 23 days, about 24 days, about 25 days, about 26 days, about 27 days, about 28 days, about 29 days, or about 30 days.
In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein are administered administered daily, every other day, every other day 3 times a week, every 2 weeks, every 3 weeks, every 4 weeks, every 5 weeks, every 3 days, every 4 days, every 5 days, every 6 days, weekly, bi-weekly, 3 times a week, 4 times a week, 5 times a week, 6 times a week, once a month, twice a month, 3 times a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 5 months, or once every 6 months. In some instances, the method for the administration of multiple compounds (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof and another therapeutic agent) comprises administering compounds within 48 hours or less of each other. In some embodiments administration occurs within 24 hours, 16 hours, 12 hours, 11 hours, 10 hours, 9 hours, 8 hours, 7 hours, 6 hours, 5 hours, 4 hours, 3 hours, 2 hours, 1 hour, 30 minutes, 20 minutes, 15 minutes, or 10 minutes. In some instances, the compounds are administered simultaneously.
Angiogenesis and Neovascularization
Angiogenesis is a process of sprouting into a new vessel from an existing vessel. This process is associated with the migration and proliferation of vascular endothelial cell. Angiogenesis is relative to many serious human diseases, such as malignant tumor. So far, it was found that ocular angiogenesis diseases comprise age-related macular degeneration (AMD) , diabetic retinopathy, neovascular glaucoma, and so on. The common characteristic of these diseases lies in the abnormal proliferation of ocular angiogenesis (Xiao Jin, et al., “Research Progress on the Clinical Application and Basic Mechanism of Anti-VEGF Drug, ” CHINA FOREIGN MEDICAL TREATMENT, 2012) .
Angiogenesis and neovascularization are both regulated by a mixture of stimulators and inhibitors that are balanced to ensure the proper construction of blood vessels in the body. Mis-regulated angiogenesis or neovascularization is the underlying cause of numerous diseases and conditions. Inhibition of angiogenesis or neovascularization can be a useful therapy for diseases such as macular degeneration, diabetic nephropathy, rheumatoid arthritis, atherosclerotic plaques, endometriosis, Crohn's disease, uterine fibroids, benign prostatic hyperplasia, psoriasis, corneal neovascularization, iris neovascularization, choroidal neovascularization and cancer.
Multiple molecular mediators of angiogenesis have been identified including basic and acidic fibroblast growth factors (aFGF, bFGF) , transforming growth factors alpha and beta (TGFα, TGFβ) , platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF) , angiogenin, platelet-derived endothelial  cell growth factor (PD-ECGF) , interleukin-8 (IL-8) , and vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) . Other stimulators implicated in angiogenesis include angiopoietin-1, Del-1, follistatin, granulocyte colony-stimulating factor (G-CSF) , hepatocyte growth factor (HGF) , leptin, midkine, placental growth factor, pleiotrophin (PTN) , progranulin, proliferin, and tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-alpha) . In addition, control of angiogenesis is further mediated by a number of negative regulators of angiogenesis produced by the body including angioarrestin, ngiostatin (plasminogen fragment) , antiangiogenic antithrombin III, cartilage-derived inhibitor (GDI) , CD59 complement fragment, endostatin (collagen XVIII fragment) , fibronectin fragment, gro-beta, heparinases, heparin hexasaccharide fragment, human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG) , interferon alpha/beta/gamma, interferon inducible protein (IP-10) , interleukin-12, kringle 5 (plasminogen fragment) , metalloproteinase inhibitors (TIMPs) , 2-methoxyestradiol, placental ribonuclease inhibitor, plasminogen activator inhibitor, platelet factor-4 (PF4) , prolactin 16kD fragment, proliferin-related protein (PRP) , retinoids, tetrahydrocortisol-S, thrombospondin-1 (TSP-1) , vasculostatin, and vasostatin (calreticulin fragment) . Among these angiogenic regulators, VEGF appears to play a key role as a positive regulator of the abnormal angiogenesis accompanying tumor growth (reviewed in Brown et al, (1996) Control of Angiogenesis (Goldberg and Rosen, eds. ) Birkhauser, Basel, and Thomas (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 603-606) . Furthermore, recently the role of the PDGF-B member of the PDGF family of signaling molecules has been under investigation, since it appears to play a role in the formation, expansion and proper function of perivascular cells, sometimes referred to as mural cells, e.g., vascular smooth muscle, mesangial cells, and pericytes.
Vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 2 (VEGFR2) , also called kinase insert Domain receptor (KDR) , family members are receptor tyrosine kinases, e.g., VEGFR1, VEGFR2 and so on. These receptors play an important role in the growth and metastasis of malignant tumors as well as in the development process of diseases such as vascular proliferative diseases (e.g., macular degeneration and tumor) . EGFR2/KDR/Flk-1 (vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 2) is a transmembrane receptor tyrosine kinase that mediates the angiogenic effects of VEGF-A and VEGF-C. It is expressed primarily on vascular endothelial cells and endothelial cell progenitors. It is also expressed on endometrial epithelium, hematopoietic stem cells, liver sinusoidal endothelial cells, Sertoli cells and Leydig cells, platelets and megakaryocytes, sensory and autonomic neurons, Schwann cells, Muller glial cells, retinal progenitors, and osteoblasts. VEGFR2 can associate with VEGFR1, and a soluble form of VEGFR2 can circulate in the serum.
Platelet-derived growth factor receptors (PDGF-R) family members are receptor tyrosine kinases, e.g., PDGFRα and PDGFRβ, and colony-stimulating factor-1 receptor, stem cell growth factor receptor KIT, and so on. It was found that these kinases are closely associated with the occurrence and development of tumors. The abnormal expression of PDGFR has been found in melanoma, meningeoma, neuroendocrine neoplasm, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer and pancreatic cancer. The abnormal activation of KIT is a direct inducement of the occurrence and development of many tumors.
FGFR (Fibroblast Growth Factor Receptor) family members comprise FGFR1, FGFR2 and so on, which are closely associated with cancers. For example, the abnormal activation of FGFR2 has been found in endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, breast cancer, lung cancer and stomach cancer. SRC kinase family comprises proteins having tyrosine protein kinase activity. SRC kinase family, as an oncegene protein, is initially found in Rous Sarcoma Virus. It has been found that the inhibition of SRC has some treatment and improvement effect on cancers or other diseases. p38 Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MAPK) Pathway is intracellular stress response signal pathway, which is closely associated with inflammatory response.
Macular degeneration is mainly divided into two types, dry and wet, wherein wet macular degeneration (AMD) is characterized by new vessel of choroid entering the retina and the subsequent pathological changes such as bleeding, exudation and edema. Wet macular degeneration will cause a rapid loss of vision, which is more serious than dry macular degeneration. Currently, there is a good progress in the treatment of wet macular degeneration. The early laser-cauterizing hemostasis is replaced by VEGF antagonists, however, the latter is replaced by photodynamic therapy soon due to the poor effect. Although photodynamic therapy has an improved efficacy, it is still unsatisfactory. Recently, a new VEGF antagonist-Lucentis, which is a recombinant of human-derived VEGF subtype monoclonal antibody fragment, is developed and it could reduce angiogenesis. This medicament is approved by U.S. FDA for treating wet macular degeneration in 2006, which has a good efficacy; and meanwhile, it was found that this anti-VEGF drug also has therapeutic effect on diabetic retinopathy and neovascular glaucoma. However, since Lucentis is an antibody drug with an extremely high price, it cannot popularize all over the world. Therefore, it is an intense competition focus in the current international pharmaceutical industry to develop small molecular angiogenesis inhibitor medicament having excellent efficacy and low price.
Kits/Articles of Manufacture
The disclosure also provides kits for treating a disease or disorder associated with the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis. Such kits generally will comprise one or more of the ophthalmic compositions disclosed herein, and instructions for using the kit. The disclosure also contemplates the use of one or more of the ophthalmic compositions, in the manufacture of medicaments for treating, abating, reducing, or ameliorating the symptoms of a disease, dysfunction, or disorder in a mammal, such as a human that has, is suspected of having, or at risk for developing a disease or disorder associated with the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis.
In some embodiments, kits include a carrier, package, or container that is compartmentalized to receive one or more containers such as vials, tubes, and the like, each of the container (s) including one of the separate elements to be used in a method described herein. Suitable containers include, for example, bottles, vials, syringes, and test tubes. In other embodiments, the containers are formed from a variety of materials such as glass or plastic.
The articles of manufacture provided herein contain packaging materials. Packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical products are also presented herein. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,323,907, 5,052,558 and 5,033,252. Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are not limited to, drop bottles, tubes, pumps, bags, vials, containers, syringes, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for a selected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment. A wide array of ophthalmic compositions provided herein are contemplated as are a variety of treatments for any disease, disorder, or condition that would benefit by controlled release administration of an ophthalmic agent to the eye.
In some embodiments, a kit includes one or more additional containers, each with one or more of various materials (such as rinses, wipes, and/or devices) desirable from a commercial and user standpoint for use of a formulation described herein. Such materials also include labels listing contents and/or instructions for use and package inserts with instructions for use. A set of instructions is optionally included. In a further embodiment, a label is on or associated with the container. In yet a further embodiment, a label is on a container when letters, numbers or other characters forming the label are attached, molded or etched into the container itself; a label is associated with a container when it is present within a receptacle or carrier that also holds the container, e.g., as a package insert. In other embodiments a label is used to indicate that the contents are to be used for a specific therapeutic application. In yet another embodiment, a label also indicates directions for use of the contents, such as in the methods described herein.
In certain embodiments, the ophthalmic compositions are presented in a dispenser device which contains one or more unit dosage forms containing a compound provided herein. In a further embodiment, the dispenser device is accompanied by instructions for administration. In yet a further embodiment, the dispenser is also accompanied with a notice associated with the container in form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use, or sale of pharmaceuticals, which notice is reflective of approval by the agency of the form of the drug for human or veterinary administration. In another embodiment, such notice, for example, is the labeling approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for prescription drugs, or the approved product insert. In yet another embodiment, compositions containing a compound provided herein formulated in a compatible pharmaceutical carrier are also prepared, placed in an appropriate container, and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition.
III. Methods of Synthesis
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, comprising a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension, comprising:
(i) micronizing the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof;
(ii) sterilizing the micronized compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(iii) admixing a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof with the least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
In an aspect, provided herein is a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration, comprising:
(i) micronizing the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof;
(ii) sterilizing the micronized compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
(iii) admixing a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof with the least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
In some embodiments, a suspension comprising particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is formed.
In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed before the admixing. In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed after the admixing.
In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed at a temperature of about 121 ℃. In some embodiments, the sterilization is performed for a period of from about 20 to about 30 minutes.
It is understood that the examples and embodiments described herein are for illustrative purposes only and that various modifications or changes in light thereof will be suggested to persons skilled in the art and are to be included within the spirit and purview of this application and scope of the appended claims. All publications, patents, and patent applications cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety for all purposes.
IV. Examples
Examples 1-5 summarize the development of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, which is indicated for the treatment of corneal neovascularization. Initially, the quality target product profile (QTPP) was defined based on the properties of the drug substance. Our investigation during pharmaceutical development focused on those CQAs that could be impacted by a realistic change to the drug product formulation or manufacturing process. For KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, these CQAs included appearance, particle size, viscosity, osmotic pressure, pH, assay, impurity, visible particles and sterile. The drug substance used for our development and the pivotal batch manufacturing was sourced from Asymchem Life Science (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. (No. 71, 7th Avenue, TEDA Tianjin, 300457, P.R. China) . For formulation development, excipient grade selection was based on experience or supplier recommendation, level of the key excipient was optimized. For process development, this includes micronization, sterilization,  filtration and mixing steps. Micronization, sterilization, filtration and mixing step were identified as critical process parameters (CPPs) and acceptable ranges were identified. During preparation, an acceptable range for assay and particle size was identified. Scale-up principles and plans were discussed for scaling up from lab to pilot scale (~50.0 kg common blend) . A ~50.0 kg cGMP exhibit batch was manufactured at pilot scale. The operating ranges for identified CPPs at commercial scale were proposed and will be qualified and continually verified during routine commercial manufacture. Finally, a control strategy that process parameters identified as potentially high risk variables was proposed. Our control strategy also includes in-process controls and finished product specifications. The process will be monitored during the lifecycle of the product and additional knowledge gained will be utilized to make adjustments to the control strategy as appropriate.
Example 1: Product Target Quality Profile/Drug Product
Based on the physicochemical characteristics of the KDR2-2 performed during early development stage, a target product profile was established to guide the development of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop.
Table 1. Product Target Quality Profile for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000050
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000051
Table 2 summarizes the quality attributes of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop and indicates which attributes were classified as drug product critical quality attributes (CQAs) . For this product, particle size, sedimentation volume ratio, osmotic pressure, viscosity, pH, assay of sodium thiosulfate, content uniformity, assay and impurity are identified as the subset of CQAs that have the potential to be impacted by the formulation and/or process variables.
Table 2. Critical and Non-critical Quality Attributes of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000052
Chemical name:
2- (2-Aminopyrimidin-4-yloxy) -N- (3- (trifluoromethyl) phenyl) quinoline-5-carboxamide
Chemical Structure:
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000053
Molecular formula: C 21H 14F 3N 5O 2
Molecular weight: 425.36
Physical description: White solid
Physical-chemical Characteristics of the Drug Substance
Aqueous solubility:
The solubility of KDR2-2 in different media was measured and is presented in Table 3.
Table 3. Solubility of KDR2-2 in different media
Medium Solubility Medium Solubility
Methanol 6.3<S<9.5 Ethyl acetate 3.8<S<4.6
Ethanol 2.4<S<2.7 Methyl tert-butyl ether S<1.2
Iso-propyl alcohol S<1.1 Tetrahydrofuran S>18.0
Acetonitrile 1.7<S<1.9 Dimethylsulfoxide S>28.0
Acetone 7.7<S<11.5 Chloroform S<1.1
Acetone/Water 7.3<S<11.0 Toluene S<0.9
Methyl isobutyl ketone 1.8<S<2.2 Water S<1.1
Particle sizes: KDR2-2 is a poorly soluble drug with large particle sizes. The drug substance should be micronized to meet the quality standards of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop. The result of microscopic observation of KDR2-2 (Batch #CK0120554-02-03P-01-32-01) in 1%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000054
HS 15 is shown in FIG. 1, and the particle sizes of KDR2-2 (Batch #CK0120554-02-03P-01-32-01) in 1%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000055
HS 15 were measured by malvern and is presented in Table 4.
Table 4. Particle size results of KDR2-2 API, batch #CK0120554-02-03P-01-32-01
Sample D10 (μm) D50 (μm) D90 (μm)
1 55.9 162 375
2 33.0 105 292
3 45.5 138 353
Example 2: Excipient Compatability Study
The excipients used in KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop were selected based on the excipient compatibility s tudies and the intent to prepare a simple suspension eye drop formulation with acceptable physical/chemical characteristics while providing good manufacturability using our process. A summary of the excipient-drug substance compatibility studies and the selection of each excipient grade are provided in this example.
Referring to the drug stability guiding principle, the pilot samples (Batch #FNB190016-002) and blank excipient solution (Batch #FNB190016-003) were stored at 60 ℃, 40 ℃ and illumination (4500Lx ± 500Lx) for 5, 10, and 30 days. Excipient-drug substance compatibility was assessed through the results of appearance, pH, viscosity, osmotic pressure, particle size, assay and impurity, which are summarized in Table 6. Common excipients functioning as polymer suspending agent, solubilizer, pH adjuster, osmotic pressure regulator and antioxidant were evaluated in the excipient compatibility study.
Table 5. Summary of KDR2-2 Suspension EyeDrop Excipients
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000056
Table 6. Excipient compatibility result for KDR2-2 Suspension EyeDrop, 0.1%w/v, batch #FNB190016-002 and FNB190016-003
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000057
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000058
*When the impurity below 0.05%, it is reported as "N.D" . Only when the impurity is higher than 0.05%, then it will be calculated as total impurity
White flocculent precipitates were appeared in KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop after the samples were stored at 60 ℃ for 10 days, and some samples approached to clarified liquid for 30 days. There is no obvious change in appearance, assay and impurity of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop and the blank solution in 40 ℃ and illumination for 30 days. Therefore, it is believed that the excipients are compatible with the drug substance. The compatibility of the drug substance with excipients was again confirmed by the stability studies on submission batches. The results of such studies under accelerated conditions (40 ℃/NMT 25%RH) are summarized below.
Excipient Grade Selection
Based on the results of excipient compatibility studies, hypromellose (HPMC E4M) , polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate (
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000059
HS 15) , sodium dihydrogen phosphate dehydrate (NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O) , sodium  chloride and sodium thiosulfate were selected for the product development. The selection of excipient grade and supplier was based on previous formulation experience and knowledge about excipients that have been used successfully in approved products manufactured. The level of excipients used in the formulation was studied in subsequent formulation development studies.
Table 7. Initial selection of excipient type and grade
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000060
Hypromellose (HPMC E4M) :
Hypromellose (HPMC E4M) is widely used as polymer suspending agent for Suspension Eye Drop. The product name is METHOCEL TM.
Polyoxyl 15-Hydroxystearate (
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000061
HS 15) :
Polyoxyl 15-Hydroxystearate is a new kind of excipient with high solubilization ability and low histamine release, low hemolytic activity and excellent physiological tolerance, which is approved for injection. Its safety is support by listed products and clinical research data.
Sodium Dihydrogen Phosphate Dihydrate (NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O) :
It is widely used as pH adjuster, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
Di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O) :
It is widely used as pH adjuster, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
Sodium Chloride:
Sodium chloride is widely used as osmotic pressure regulator, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
Sodium thiosulfate:
Sodium thiosulfate as an antioxidant, sourced from Sinopharm Chemical Reagent Co., Ltd. The quality should meet the requirements. The continue production will use Merck brand for clinical use.
Excipient Dosage Selection
Based on the initial formulation development, it is determined that the dosage of excipients meets the Inactive Ingredient Database (IIG) and the conventional dosage of excipients published in the Excipients Database of the National Drug Evaluation Center which is shown in Table 8.
Table 8. Excipient dosage of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000062
*The daily usage is three times a day, three drops each time.
**The dosage of IIG used in the ophthalmic preparation, wherein the IIG of sodium thiosulfate is used in intravenous. The data shows that the content of
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000063
HS 15 in the injection product (Panitol) is 50%.
The dosage of excipients used in this product is lower than the IIG dosage of the ophthalmic preparation or the intravenous preparation provided by the FDA approved drug inactive ingredient database.
Example 3. Drug Product Formulation Development
Initial Formulation Development
The formulation development started with several small R&D batches (FNB180076-048-01 to FNB180076-065-03) . The amount of each excipient in the formula was adjusted and optimized in these batches to give our drug product acceptable physical characteristics. All of these adjustments led to prototype formulation FNB180076-065-03, which showed acceptable  physical characteristics. Some of the bench scale trials are listed in Table 9. Table 10 provides physical characterizations of the lead bench scale-formulation. The results suggested that the basic composition developed during bench scale trials can produce acceptable physical characteristics. By evaluating the physicals of above trial batches, it is illustrated that the osmotic pressure of the preparation could be affected by di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate, sodium chloride and sodium thiosulfate, the concentration of Hypromellose (HPMC E4M) affected the viscosity of the formulation. In order to reduce the sedimentation of the drug substance, FNB180076-065-03 was selected as lead bench scale formulation.
Table 9. Compositions of initial formulation trials, KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, Batch #FNB180076-048-01, 050-02, 050-03, 052-01, 052-03, 058-01, 058-03, 065-01, 065-02 and 065-03
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000064
Table 10. Physicals of lead bench scale formulation for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, Batch #FNB180076-048-01, 050-02, 050-03, 052-01, 052-03, 058-01, 058-03, 065-01, 065-02 and 065-03
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000065
Preliminary Stability Study
Further R&D batches (batch#FNB180076-071-01, batch: 2000 vials) which contained the same level of ingredients as FNB180076-065-03 were evaluated to confirm stability under  long-term conditions (25 ℃/65%RH) . No pH, viscosity, osmotic pressure, particle size, assay and impurity were observed out of range, so it could be concluded that the formulation was stable and eligible for further development.
Table 11. Physicals of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop under Long-term Conditions (25 ℃/65%RH)
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000066
*When the impurity below 0.05%, it is reported as "<N.D" . Only when the impurity is higher than 0.05%, then it will be calculated as total impurity.
The formulation composition was finalized based on Formulation Development Studies. The level of hypromellose (HPMC E4M) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate, sodium chloride and sodium thiosulfate were optimized. The finalized formulation for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, is presented in Table 12.
Table 12.
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000067
Example 4. Manufacturing Process Development
The process parameters that can potentially impact the finished product quality attributes. The process parameters used at the very first process step determine the quality attributes of the output material (intermediate) produced at this step. Process parameters of the intermediate from this step in the manufacturing process will determine quality attributes of the next intermediate and, eventually, those of the finished drug product. The API Micronization, API suspension sterilization process, hypromellose (HPMC E4M) preparation process, the blank solution filtration and the stirring /mixing process are CPPs of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, which were investigated and the product quality attributes were evaluated.
Drug Substance Particle Size Selection for Product Development
The drug particle size for suspension eye drops should be reduced to level <10 μm in an attempt to avoid excessive lacrimation, the micronization process of drug substance was studied. The micronization process parameters of the jet are: injection pressure is 5 bar; crushing pressure is 3 bar. The particle size and distribution of the KDR2-2 API were measured before and after pulverization, to determine whether the API satisfies the formulation requirements after pulverization. The results are shown in FIGs. 4 and Table 13.
Table 13. Particle size results of KDR2-2 API after pulverization, Batch #CKo120554-02-03P-01-32-01
Sample D10 (μm) D50 (μm) D90 (μm)
1 0.957 3.55 8.03
2 0.949 3.46 7.59
3 0.946 3.41 7.47
The API Suspension Sterilization Process Development
The purpose of the moist heat sterilization process is to ensure the API and product are sterile. Three sterilization methods of API were investigated: moist heat sterilization with API, moist heat sterilization with API, 0.1%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000068
HS 15 and HPMC E4M, moist heat sterilization with API and 0.1%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000069
HS 15, the particle size of the product were evaluated and the results are shown in Table 14.
Table 14. Effect of the API suspension sterilization process, Batch #FNB180076-130-01, 099-01 and 101
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000070
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000071
From particle size results, the moist heat sterilization with API only is applied for batch production that the particle size of the product was smaller than others.
Hypromellose (HPMC E4M) Preparation Process Development
HPMC E4M Preparation Processes:
(1) HPMC E4M is sterilized after dissolving, and added to the API suspension after cooling which is stirred and dispersed after sterilization with other excipients solution;
(2) HPMC E4M is added to the API suspension after dissolving, which is stirred and dispersed after sterilization with other excipients solution;
(3) HPMC E4M is mixed with other excipients solution and filtered by 0.65μm and 0.2 μm membranes after dissolving, then added to the API suspension which is not dispersed after sterilization.
Table 15. Effect of HPMC E4M Preparation Process, Batch #FNB180076-071-01, 088 and 095
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000072
For process (1) , the particle size of the product was less than 10μm, but the production line of Zhuhai ESSEX Bio-Pharmaceutical CO., Ltd. is only equipped with one sterilizable tank, so the process can't fit the workshop. The HPMC E4M concentration of batch FNB180076-071-01 and FNB180076-088 is 0.45%, the blank solution was difficult to filtrate with viscosity 27.77 mPa·s of the product, so the HPMC E4M concentration is adjusted to 0.40%. For process (3) , the particle size of the product was more than 10μm, but the particle size did not change significantly after the scale is enlarged, and the blank solution could be smoothly filtered and sterilized. The process (3) of HPMC E4M preparation process is applied for batch production.
The Blank Solution Filtration Process Development
Filtration is the process for removing microorganisms in liquid or gas by physical retention to achieve the quality requirements associated with sterile pharmaceuticals. The effects of filtration on the product should be investigated by filter adsorption experiments and compatibility experiments. PES and PVDF were selected, the blank solution was sterilized by filtration through a 0.2 μm filter, and the adsorption of the antioxidant sodium thiosulfate and impurities were evaluated. The results are shown in Table 16.
Table 16. Effect of the blank solution filtration process, Batch #FNB180076-079
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000073
There was no significant change in the content of sodium thiosulfate before and after filtration of the blank solution. After soaking for 4 hours, no relevant substances were detected. It is indicated that the filtration of PES and PVDF did not cause correlation and adsorption
The Stirring /Mixing Process Development
The purpose of the stirring /mixing process is to obtain a suspension with uniform particle size. The influence of the stirring time on the particle size of the product is mainly investigated. From the particle size results, the longer of stirring time, the smaller of the particle size obtain of the product.
Table 17. Effect of Stirring /Mixing Time on the particle size of the product, Batch #FNB180076-130-01
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000074
Example 5. Scale-Up from Lab to Pilot Scale
Process development was conducted on the lab scale (1.0 kg) . This section describes the principles used to scale-up the process to the pilot scale (~50.0 kg) in order to manufacture the exhibit batch. Table 18 below summarizes the different process scales.
Table 18. Process scale summary
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000075
Scale-Up of the KDR2-2 API Micronization Process
The jet which has same mechanize with the one utilized during the drug substance particle size selection for product development studies was used for the pilot scale production. The LOD of pilot batch and scale up batches will be controlled the same range with lab scale. The particle size of API will be evaluated.
Scale-Up of the Batching System Sterilization Process
In order to ensure the quality of the filter, the flow rate of the filter element was tested before production. The first filter is equipped with 0.65μm polyethersulfone filter and the second filter is equipped with 0.2 μm polyethersulfone filter, then both are connected with initial tank, and vacuum tank. The batching system was subjected to moist heat sterilization at a temperature of 121 ℃ for 30 minutes. After the sterilization is completed, the vacuum stirring tank was cooled to below 70 ℃.
Scale-Up of HPMC E4M Solution Preparation Process
The HPMC E4M was added to 60-70 ℃ water for injection, then stirred to a clear solution at room temperature and cooled to below 30 ℃.
Scale-Up of
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000076
HS 15 Solution Preparation Process
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000077
HS 15 was melted to a liquid state in a 40-50 ℃ water bath, and accurately weighed after stirring evenly, then added water for injection below 30 ℃ and stirred.
Scale-Up of the API Suspension Sterilization Process
The API suspension sterilization process scale-up is summarized in Table 19.
Table 19. Scale-up of the API suspension sterilization
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000078
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000079
Scale-Up of the Blank Solution Preparation and Filtration Process
Sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate, di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate, sodium chloride and sodium thiosulfate were added separately to the
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000080
HS 15 solution, and stirred until the material is completely dissolved and transferred to HPMC E4M solution, then the blank solution was mixed. The blank solution was filtrated by 0.65μm and 0.2μm filter to the API suspension, then the volume of KDR2-2 suspension was fixed with water for injection below 30 ℃.
Scale-Up of the Stirring /Mixing Process
The stirring /mixing process scale-up is summarized in Table 20.
Table 20. Scale-up of the Stirring /Mixing
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000081
Scale-Up of the Filling Process
The KDR2-2 suspension was filled by BFS (Blowing Filling and Sealing) integration equipment.
Comparison of Manufacturing Equipment
The manufacturing equipment that will be used to manufacture of the proposed pilot batches is list in the table below.
Table 21. Manufacturing Equipment
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000082
Exihibit Batch
Based on the development studies and the scale-up principles, Zhuhai ESSEX Bio-Pharmaceutical CO., Ltd. manufactured submission batches for 0.1%w/v (Bostal Batch #FNB190016-002) , 0.1%w/v (ESSEX Batch #STH101-20190401) and 0.1%w/v (ESSEX Batch #STH101-20190402) .
In the case, the KDR2-2 API micronization and sterilization, the preparation and filtration of blank solution, and stirring /mixing process were success and formulations were proven to process as expected according to the instructions in the batch records. Upon evaluation, the tables showed acceptable physiochemical and stability properties.
The submission batches were analyzed, evaluated and released as per the respective protocols and specifications. The purpose of these evaluations was to demonstrate that the formula and the manufacturing processes used in the production of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop produced finished products that were within the pre-specified criteria. The results indicated that the physicochemical attributes of the new product were acceptable and in accordance to preset specifications in the corresponding evaluation protocols.
Batch Formula for Pivotal Batch
Table 22. Batch Formula for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, Pivotal Batch #FNB190016-002, STH101-20190401 and STH101-20190402
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000084
Critical Process Parameters and In Process Controls
Table 23. Critical Process Parameters for Pivotal Batch for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, Pivotal 0.1%w/v, Pivotal Batch #FNB190016-002, STH101-20190401 and STH101-20190402
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000085
Pivotal Batch Testing Results
The following section details evaluation of the Pivotal batch of the manufacturing.
1) Physical Characterizations study
Table A
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000086
The testing results are summarized as below.
Table 24. Physicals of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v of pH, particle size and Osmotic Pressure; Batch #FNB190016-002, STH101-20190401 and STH101-20190402
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000087
Table 25. Physicals of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v of Assay, Content Uniformity and Impurity; Batch #FNB190016-002, STH101-20190401 and STH101-20190402
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000088
Table 26. Assay of Sodium Thiosulfate of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v; Batch #FNB190016-002, STH101-20190401 and STH101-20190402
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000089
2) In-process control
Table 27. Finished Product Testing Results for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v; Batch #FNB190016-002
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000090
Table 28. Finished Product Testing Results for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v; Batch #Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v; Batch #STH101-20190401
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000091
Table 29. Finished Product Testing Results for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v; Batch #Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v; Batch #STH101-20190402
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000092
Container Closure System
The KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v is packed in the following container closure systems.
Table 30. Packaging Configurations for KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v, batch #FNB190016-002, STH101-20190401 and STH101-20190402
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000093
The proposed container/closure used for packaging our drug product complies with the applicable USP <661>, <671> requirements.
Microbiological Attributes
Materials and Methods
Thioglycolate fluid medium, tryptic soy mash liquid medium, tryptic soy agar medium, pH 7.0 sterile sodium chloride-peptone buffer, 1%polysorbate 80 -pH 7.0 sterile chlorine Sodium-peptone buffer, 0.9%sterile sodium chloride solution, and so on.
Instruments and appliances
HTY-601 type bacteria collection instrument, KAPY330 type bacteria culture incubator, sterile filter membrane (pore diameter not more than 0.45μm, diameter is 50 mm) and membrane filter, suction filter bottle, biochemical incubator and so on.
Sterile test tubes, sterile graduated straws, electronic turbidimeters or Maier's turbidimeters, sterile pipettes, scissors, inoculating rings, etc.
Preparation of test solution
KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop 60 samples squeeze into 600mL of 1%polysorbate 80-pH 7.0 sterile sodium chloride-peptone buffer, shake until completely dissolved and clarified.
Assay
Using a KAPY330 triple colony incubator, aspirate a membrane with a pH 7.0 sterile sodium chloride-peptone buffer at a speed of 150-200 rpm, then pump KDR2-2 solution into the incubator for filtration, 300 mL each time, need 2 times. After the washing, 100 mL of thioglycolate fluid medium was pumped into each of the two incubators. The other incubator was  pumped with 100 mL of tryptic soy mash liquid medium. Thioglycolate fluid medium –with less than 100 cfu/mL of Staphylococcus aureus –1 mL, was added as positive control bacteria, and 1%polysorbate 80 at pH 7.0 sterile sodium chloride-peptone buffer 100 mL. Instead of the test sample, the same operation as a negative control is performed. The thioglycolate fluid medium is cultured at 30 to 35 ℃, and the pancreatic soy meal liquid medium is cultured at 20 to 25 ℃. The culture of the collection culture incubator should be observed day by day, not less than 14 days.
Cultivation and observation
The incubator should be observed day by day during the culture and recorded for bacterial growth. If it is clarified within the time of the culture inspection, or if it is turbid, but it is confirmed that there is no microbial growth, it is judged that the test KDR2-2 formulation meets the requirements. If the medium is turbid during the cultivation process, after 14 days of culture, the presence or absence of microbial growth cannot be judged from the appearance. The medium can be transferred to the same fresh medium for 3 days if the medium is turbid again, or it can be taken the original culture solution, smeared, stained, and examined microscopically to determine whether there are bacteria.
Results
The positive control bacteria should grow well, and the negative control should not have bacteria growth. Otherwise, the experiment is invalid. If the KDR2-2 formulation medium is clarified, or although it is turbid, but confirmed to be aseptic growth, judge that the test product meets the requirements; the culture medium in any of the culture materials is turbid and confirms the growth of the bacteria, and the test sample is not It is in compliance with the regulations, unless it is sufficient to prove that the test results are invalid, that is, the growing microorganisms are not included in the test sample.
Compatibility
This product is a suspension eye drop. The results of the package compatibility study are shown in Tables 31 and 32.
Table 31. The content of related ingredients in the packaging materials and preparations
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000094
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000095
Table 32. Determination of the content of each element in the packaging materiaL
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000096
*ND indicates detected value less than 0.5 μg/L
The five antioxidants (3114, 1010, 330, 1076, 168) and 2-mercaptobenzothiazole (2-MBT) were not detected in the packaging materials and preparations. Contents of the lubricant methyl palmitate and methyl stearate in the packaging materials were 40.7 μg/g and 13.8 μg/g, respectively, were not detected in the preparations. The contents of the volatiles DBB, DBP, and DBHBA in the packaging materials were 0.08 μg/g, 5.89 μg/g, and 0.09 μg/g, respectively, were not detected in the preparation. The content of inorganic elements in the packaging material meets the requirements of the European Pharmacopoeia. Therefore, the selected single-dose eye drop bottle has good compatibility with the preparation and can be used as an inner package of KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop.
Control Strategy
The control strategy is the combination input material controls, process controls and monitoring, design spaces around individual or multiple unit operations, and final product specifications used to ensure consistent quality. For this product the control strategy for the proposed pilot scale process is listed in table below. In this table, the different elements of the control strategy are indicated in the third column. Operating ranges for the critical process parameters are contingent on scale up and validation. Specification and in-process controls are regulatory commitments for the proposed commercial process.
Table 33. Control strategy for Generic KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drop, 0.1%w/v
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000097
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000098
Table 34. KDR2-2 Suspension Eye Drops, 0.1%w/v Release Specification
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000099
KDR2-2 API Micronization
The particle size of KDR2-2 API will be controlled by the pressure of injection and crushing.
Batching System Sterilization
The control strategy for batching system sterilization is to maintain the sterilization temperature and time.
HPMC E4M Preparation
The control strategy for HPMC E4M preparation is control the temperature of WFI when the HPMC E4M is added.
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000100
HS 15 Solution Preparation
The control strategy for
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000101
HS 15 solution preparation is to keep the temperature when the
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000102
HS 15 is melting. The temperature of WFI should be controlled to avoid the formation of micelle.
API Suspension Sterilization
The control strategy for API Suspension Sterilization is to maintain the sterilization temperature, sterilization time and the temperature after sterilization.
Filtration
The time of blank solution filtration will be controlled by the pressure filtration.
Filling
The time of filling will be controlled by the filling volume.
Example 6. Study of the stability of KDR2-2 suspension using sodium sulfite or sodium thiosulfate as antioxidant.
Materials
● HPMC K15M
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000103
ELP, BASF
● KDR2-2 API
● Other reagents are commercially available analytical grade.
Instrument
● Laser diffraction particle size analyzer, Mastersizer 3000, Malvern, Birtain
● Osmometer, Osmomat 030, Gonotec, Germany
● PH Monitor, S20P, Mettler Toledo, Switzerland
● Balance, BSA124S, Sartorius, Germany
● UPLC, Agilent, USA
Experimental Method
KDR2-2suspension formulation stability test
Prepare the HPMC solution (8 g/900 g)
8g HPMC E4M was added into blue cap bottle, added water to 900g, 60-70 ℃ water bath heat for dissolved. then stirred to a clear solution at room temperature and cooled to below 30 ℃, before the final preparation need 121 ℃ for 30 min or filter sterilization.
HPMC: K15M/E4M
Prepare the wetting reagent solution
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000104
HS 15 was melted to a liquid state in a 40-50 ℃ water bath, and accurately weighed after stirring evenly, then added water and phosphate bufferfor, osmotic pressure regulator and antioxidant, then filter for sterilization by 0.22 μm membrane.
Wetting reagent/non-ionic solubilizer: Kolliphor ELP/HS15
Table 35 Salt solution
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000105
Preparation of suspension
Add 30 mL water and KDR2-2 micronization powder to blue cap bottle, 121 ℃ 30 min for sterilization. The temperature was cooled to below 70 ℃ then 60 g salt solution was added, stirred until the material is completely dissolved. Accelerated experiments and influential factor experiments were performed to determine potential, osmotic pressure, particle size, pH, content, and purity.
Table 36
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000106
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000107
Results and discussion
Stability of suspensions containing sodium sulfite
1.1. The 0 day test result standard curve: Y = 70925X + 466.51, R 2 = 0.9994, Percentage of average labeled amount (%) =100.19%, SD=0.69%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000108
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000109
1.2. KDR2-2 Suspension under Light (5000Lux/90uw/cm2) test result on day 5
Percentage of average labeled amount (%) =102.17%, SD=2.13%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000110
1.3. KDR2-2 Suspension under high temperature test result on day 5
Percentage of average labeled amount (%) =86.42%, SD=0.50%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000111
2. Stability of sodium thiosulfate-containing suspensions
2.1 The 0 day test result standard curve: 70925X + 466.51, R 2 = 0.9994, Percentage of average labeled amount (%) =101.65%, SD=2.38%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000112
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000113
2.2. KDR2-2 Suspension under Light (5000Lux/90uw/cm2) test result on day 5
Percentage of average labeled amount (%) =102.75%, SD=2.23%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000114
2.3. KDR2-2 Suspension under high temperature test result on day 5
Percentage of average labeled amount (%) =100.67%, SD=0.69%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000115
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000116
2.4. KDR2-2 Suspension under Light (5000Lux/90uw/cm2) test result on day 10
Percentage of average labeled amount (%) =101.28%, SD=1.48%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000117
2.5. KDR2-2 Suspension under high temperature test result on day 10
Percentage of average labeled amount (%) =100.92%, SD=1.42%
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000118
3.1 Anti-oxidant-free suspension results in accelerated test in 3 month
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000119
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000120
Example 7. Micronization of Drug Substance
The drug substance should be micronized to meet the quality standards of KDR2-2 suspension formulation. Based on the results of excipient compatibility studies, hypromellose (HPMC E4M) , polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate (
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000121
HS 15) , sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate (NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (NaH 2PO 4·12H 2O) , sodium chloride and sodium thiosulfate were selected for the product development. The selection of excipient grade and supplier was based on previous formulation experience and knowledge about excipients that have been used successfully in approved products manufactured. The level of excipients used in the formulation was studied in subsequent formulation development studies.
Critical process parameters (CPPs)
Particle sizes: Micronization of raw materials
The drug particle size for suspension eye drops should be reduced to level <10 μm in an attempt to avoid excessive lacrimation, the micronization process of drug substance was studied. Certain amount of KDR2-2 API was taken and fed into a jet mill. The micronization process parameters of the jet are: injection pressure is 5 bar; crushing pressure is 3 bar; the media for micronization is air. The particle size and distribution of the KDR2-2 API was measured before and after pulverization using the dry method (Mastersizer 3000, Malvern) , to determine whether the API satisfies the formulation requirements after pulverization. The results are as follows and in FIG. 4:
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000122
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000123
API content was determined by liquid chromatography, 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000124
plus-C18 column (4.6 × 150 mm, 5 μm) , mobile phase: acetonitrile (with 0.2‰trifluoroacetic acid) : water (with 0.2‰trifluoroacetic acid) , acetonitrile gradient 5-95%, time: 17 min, column temeperature 20℃, detection wavelength 254 nm. The results are shown as follows and in FIGS. 5A-5B:
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000125
Impurity 1 and Impurity 2 correspond to Intermediate A and Intermediate B as shown in Scheme 1 of Example 8.
Hypromellose Preparation Process Development: Screening of suspending agents, using suitable medicinal polymer excipients as suspending agents
Accurately weigh out 0.15 g of hypromellose (HPMC E4M) , add 30 mL water (WFI, 60-70 ℃) , and then stir at room termperature to get a clear solution. Cool to below 30 ℃ for next usage. Then transfer solution to a 10 mL stoppered cylinder, mix upside down 3 times. Observe and take pictures at the time on 0, 3 h, 8 h, 12 h, 24 h.
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000126
The results show that sedimentation volume ratio of each group met the requirements of the Pharmacopoeia (> 0.9) . After 24 hours of preparation, the sedimentation volume ratios of the  0.4%and 0.5%concentration groups were same. Considering the safe dosage of HPMC K15M (≤ 0.5%) , 0.4%was tentatively selected.
Wetting reagent/non-ionic solubilizer: Kolliphor ELP/HS15
0.9g HPMC was added into blue cap bottle, added water to 150mL, 60-70 ℃ water bath heat for dissolved. Accurately weigh out 4.5 g of Kolliphor HS15 add 30 mL water (WFI, 60-70 ℃) , and then stir at room termperature to get a clear solution. Cool to below 30 ℃ for next usage. Then transfer solution to a 10 mL stoppered cylinder, mix upside down 3 times. Observe and take pictures at the time on 0, 3 h, 12 h, 24 h.
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000127
Osmotic pressure regulator and pH adjuster
Sodium Dihydrogen Phosphate Dihydrate (NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O) : it is widely used as pH adjuster, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
Di-Sodium Hydrogen Phosphate Dodecahydrate (Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O) : it is widely used as pH adjuster, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
Sodium Chloride: sodium chloride is widely used as osmotic pressure regulator, the product sourced from Merck with injection grade was selected, which residual solvents and microbial limits should meet the requirements.
Sterilization process
A. KDR2-2 drug substance was micronized, added into a brown vial and sealed and subsequently sterilized by steam sterilization at 121 ℃ for 30 minutes. At the same time dispersion medium solution (excipient solution) was prepared as prescribed, excipient solution by filtration through a 0.2 μm polyethersulfone (PES) microporous filter, then After the sterilization  was completed, mix the KDR2-2 drug substance and the dispersion medium solution (excipient solution) under sterile conditions.
B. KDR2-2 drug substance was micronized, add all of the excipient substance except the HS 15 into a brown vial (total quality solution is 50 g) and sealed and subsequently sterilized by steam sterilization at 121℃ for 30 minutes, add the HS 15 which is by filtration through a 0.2 μm polyethersulfone.
C. KDR2-2 drug substance was micronized, HS 15 was prepared as prescribed (dissolve in water, total quality is 50 g) , add them into a beaker. After by stirring, add the remaining prescription ingredients and sealed, sterilized by steam sterilization at 121 ℃ for 20 minutes.
Description of Production Process 1:
1. HPMC was added into 60-70 ℃ water (WFI) 1L for swelling, then stirring to a clear solution at room temperature add more 2L WFI.
2. HPMC sterilized by steam sterilization at 121 ℃ for 30 minutes. Cool to room temperature with stirring, marked as solution A.
3. Accurately weigh out 0.15g of 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000128
HS15, add WFI then stir at room termperature to get a clear solution, marked as solution B.
4. Accurately weigh of NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O, Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O, sodium chloride, sodium thiosulfate as prescription, add WFI 1L then stir at room termperature to get a clear solution, marked as solution C.
5. Mixed solution B and solution C, filtration through a 0.2 μm polyethersulfone (PES) microporous filter, marked as solution D.
6. Accurately weigh of KDR2-2 add WFI 1L, sterilized by steam sterilization at 121℃ for 30 minutes, marked as API solution E.
7. Add solution D to the solution E, stirring to a clear solution, add solution A, then add WFI to the 10 L.
8. Sampling to detect pH, osmotic pressure, particle size and distribution, microbial limit, drug content, sedimentation ratio, viscosity, etc.
9. Perfom filling using filling machine. The filling volume is 0.4mL per bottle.
Description of Production Process 2:
1. HPMC was added into 60-70 ℃ water (WFI) 1L for swelling, then stirring to a clear solution at room temperature add more 2L WFI, marked as solution A.
2. Accurately weigh as the prescription request of
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000129
HS15, add WFI 2 Lthen stir at room termperature to get a clear solution, marked as solution B.
3. Accurately weigh of NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O, Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O, Sodium Chloride, Sodium Thiosulfate as prescription, add WFI 1L then stir at room termperature to get a clear solution, marked as solution C.
4. Mixed solution A and solution B and solution C, filtration through a 0.2 μm polyethersulfone (PES) microporous filter, marked as solution D.
5. Accurately weigh of KDR2-2 add WFI 1L, sterilized by steam sterilization at 121℃ for 30 minutes, marked as API solution E.
6. Add solution D to the solution E, stirring to a clear solution, add solution A, then add WFI to the 10 L.
7. Sampling to detect pH, osmotic pressure, particle size and distribution, microbial limit, drug content, sedimentation ratio, viscosity, etc.
8. Perfom filling using filling machine. The filling volume is 0.4mL per bottle.
Describe Production Process 3: Preparation of micelles
1. HPMC was added into 60-70 ℃ water (WFI) 1L for swelling, then stirring to a clear solution at room temperature add more 2L WFI, marked as solution A.
2. Accurately weigh as the prescription request of 
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000130
HS15, add WFI 2 L, then stir at room termperature to get a clear solution, marked as solution B.
3. Accurately weigh of NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O, Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O, Sodium Chloride, Sodium Thiosulfate as prescription, add WFI 1L then stir at room temperature to get a clear solution, marked as solution C.
4. Mixed solution A and solution B and solution C, filter through a 0.2 μm polyethersulfone (PES) microporous filter, marked as solution D.
5. Accurately weigh of KDR2-2 add WFI 1L, sterilized by steam sterilization at 121℃for 30 minutes, marked as API solution E.
6. Add solution D to the solution E, stirring to a clear solution, add solution A, then add WFI to the 10 L.
7. Sampling to detect pH, osmotic pressure, particle size and distribution, microbial limit, drug content, sedimentation ratio, viscosity, etc.
8. Perfom filling using filling machine. The filling volume is 0.4 mL per bottle.
Qualitative and quantitative formulation composition of KDR2-2 suspension formulation
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000131
Example 8. Stability Study of Formulation
From the chromatograms in FIGs. 6A-6E and FIG. 7, it can be seen that the KDR2-2 formulations are unstable at 40 ℃. Initially, the main chromatograms have a small degradation peak, however, the KDR2-2 content changes from 99.7%to nearly 97%after the first month, and 93%or 94%after the second month. At the 3 month time point at 40 ℃, KDR2-2 purity (%) average value is 97.93%, which suggests the formulations of KDR2-2 have degradation occurring at nearly 2%.
By high-throughput analysis, it was confirmed that the KDR2-2 formulations (solution or suspension) are unstable at 40 ℃. The degradation products are Intermediate A (impurity 1) and Intermediate B (impurity 2) shown in Scheme 1.
Scheme 1
Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-000132
According to eye drops preparation requests or formulation quality requirements, normal function of the eyes can endure osmotic pressure values of from about 200 to about 500 mOsmol/kg (with approximately 300 mOsmol/kg as an optimal value. ) With the regard to the hemolysis test, 300 μl RD171207 formulation add 300 μL 1*PBS, total volume is 600 μL, the value of osmotic is 350 mOsmol/kg, pH value is 7.65; and 400 μL RD171207 formulation add 200 μL ddH 2O, the value of osmotic is 560 mOsmol/kg, the pH value is 7.77.
From the RBC cells hemolysis test, dilution with water or PBS can lower the osmotic value compared to RD171207 formulations, leading to the reduction of erythrocyte hemolysis (FIG. 8) .
While preferred embodiments of the present disclosure have been shown and described herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerous variations, changes, and substitutions will now occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the disclosure. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the disclosure described herein may be employed in practicing the disclosure. It is intended that the following claims define the scope of the disclosure and that methods and structures within the scope of these claims and their equivalents be covered thereby.

Claims (95)

  1. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising:
    (i) a compound of Formula (I) :
    Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-100001
    or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
    (ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient,
    wherein the pharmaceutical composition is in a dosage form for ophthalmic dosing or administration.
  2. The composition of claim 1, wherein the dosage form is a suspension comprising fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  3. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising:
    (i) fine particles of a compound of Formula (I) :
    Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-100002
    or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
    (ii) at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient,
    wherein the pharmaceutical composition is formulated as a suspension.
  4. The composition of claim 2 or 3, wherein the particles are micronized.
  5. The composition of any one claims 2-4, wherein the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  6. The composition of any one claims 2-5, wherein the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 10 μm.
  7. The composition of any one claims 2-6, wherein the particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof have a diameter of from about 0.3 μm to about 5 μm.
  8. The composition of claim 4 or 5, wherein at least about 10%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  9. The composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8, wherein at least about 20%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  10. The pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8-9, wherein at least about 30%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  11. The composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8-10, wherein at least about 40%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  12. The composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8-11, wherein at least about 50%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  13. The composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8-12, wherein at least about 60%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  14. The composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8-13, wherein at least about 70%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  15. The composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8-14, wherein at least about 80%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  16. The composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8-15, wherein at least about 90%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  17. The composition of any one of claims 4, 5, or 8-16, wherein at least about 95%of the particles have a diameter of from about 0.1 μm to about 40 μm.
  18. The composition of any one of claims 1-4, wherein the particles have a D10 value of less than about 1 μm.
  19. The composition of any one of claims 1-4, wherein the particles have a D50 value of less than about 5 μm.
  20. The composition of any one of claims 1-4, wherein the particles have a D90 value of less than about 10 μm.
  21. The composition of any one of claims 1-20, wherein the compound of Formula (I) or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; is crystalline, microcrystalline, amorphous, or lyophilized.
  22. The composition of any one of claims 1-21 wherein the dosage form is a modified-release dosage form.
  23. The composition of claim 22, wherein the modified-release dosage form is a delayed-release dosage form, an extended-release (ER) dosage form, or a targeted-release dosage form.
  24. The composition of claim 23, wherein the ER dosage form is a sustained-release (SR) dosage form or controlled-release (CR) dosage form.
  25. The composition of any one of claims 1-25, wherein The composition comprises from about 0.025%to about 2.0%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  26. The composition of any one of claims 1-25, wherein The composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.5%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  27. The composition of any one of claims 1-25, wherein the composition comprises from about 0.05%to about 0.15%w/v of a compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  28. The composition of any one of claims 1-27, wherein the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a diluent, buffering agent, suspending agent, solubilizer, emulsifier, antioxidant, pH adjusting agent, preservative, detackifier, anti-foaming agent, chelating agent, thickening agent, viscomodulator, tonicifier, colorant, opacifier, binder, filler, plasticizer, or any combination thereof.
  29. The composition of claim 28, wherein the at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient is a suspending agent, a wetting agent, a pH adjuster, an anti-oxidant, an osmotic pressure regulator, or any combination thereof.
  30. The composition of claim 29, wherein the suspending agent is a polymer.
  31. The composition of claim 29 or 30, wherein the suspending agent is a carbomer homopolymer, carbomer copolymer, carbomer interpolymer, polycarbophil, a cellulose derivative, a polyvinyl alcohol, a povidone, a hyaluronic acid or a salt thereof, chondroitin sulfate, a natural gum, or any combination thereof.
  32. The composition of claim 31, wherein the cellulose derivative is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, or any combination thereof.
  33. The composition of claim 32, wherein the hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) is K100, K4M, K15M, K100M, E4M, E10M, or any combination thereof.
  34. The composition of any one of claims 30-33, wherein the suspending agent is hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) .
  35. The composition of claim 34, wherein the hypromellose is HPMC E4M.
  36. The composition of any one of claims 30-35, wherein the concentration of the suspending agent in the compositions is up to about 1%w/w.
  37. The composition of any one of claims 30-36, wherein the concentration of the suspending agent in the formulation is up to about 0.5%w/w.
  38. The composition of any one of claims 28-37, wherein the solubilizer is
    Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-100003
    ELP, 
    Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-100004
    HS 15, or a combination thereof.
  39. The composition of claim 38, wherein the solubilizer is
    Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-100005
    HS 15.
  40. The composition of claim 38 or 39, wherein the concentration of the solubilizer in the composition is up to about 5%w/w.
  41. The composition of any one of claims 28-40, wherein the wetting agent is polyoxyl 15-hydroxystearate.
  42. The composition of any one of claims 28-31, wherein the pH adjuster is a buffer.
  43. The composition claim 42, wherein the buffer is a phosphate buffer or a hydrate thereof.
  44. The composition claim 43, wherein the phosphate buffer is potassium phosphate or a hydrate thereof.
  45. The composition of claim 44, wherein the phosphate buffer is sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate (NaH 2PO 4·2H 2O) , di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate (Na 2HPO 4·12H 2O) , or a combination thereof.
  46. The composition of any one of claims 28-45, wherein the osmotic pressure regulator is a salt.
  47. The composition of claim 46, wherein the salt is sodium chloride.
  48. The composition of claim 46 or 47, wherein the concentration of the osmotic pressure regulator in the composition is up to about 0.5%w/w.
  49. The composition of any one of claims 28-48, wherein the anti-oxidant is a thiosulfate.
  50. The composition of claim 49, wherein the thiosulfate is sodium thiosulfate.
  51. The composition of claim 49 or 50, wherein the concentration of the anti-oxidant in the composition is up to about 0.2%w/w.
  52. The composition of any one of claims 1-51, wherein the composition is stable for up to 24 months at a temperature of from about 20 ℃ to about 25 ℃.
  53. The composition of any one of claims 1-52, wherein the composition is substantially free of impurities.
  54. The composition of any one of claims 1-53, wherein the composition is at least about 90%pure.
  55. The composition of any one of claims 1-54, wherein the composition is at least about 95%pure.
  56. The composition of any one of claims 1-55, wherein the composition is at least about 96%pure.
  57. The composition of any one of claims 1-56, wherein the composition is at least about 97%pure.
  58. The composition of any one of claims 1-57, wherein the composition is at least about 98%pure.
  59. The composition of any one of claims 1-58, wherein the composition is at least about 99%pure.
  60. The composition of any one of claims 1-59, wherein the composition is at least about 99.1%, about 99.2%, about 99.3%, about 99.4%, about 99.5%, about 99.6%, about 99.7%, about 99.8%, about 99.9%, or about 100%pure.
  61. The composition of any one of claims 1-59, wherein the composition comprises up to about 2%w/w of total impurities.
  62. The composition of any one of claims 1-59, wherein the composition comprises less than about 0.9%w/w, about 0.8%w/w, about 0.7%w/w, about 0.6%w/w, about 0.5%w/w, about 0.4%w/w, about 0.3%w/w, about 0.2%w/w, or about 0.1%w/w of total impurities.
  63. The composition of claim 61 or 62, wherein the impurity is a degradant.
  64. The composition of any one of claims 61-63, wherein the impurity comprises the compound of Formula (II) :
    Figure PCTCN2021089415-appb-100006
  65. The composition of any one of claims 1-59, the composition comprises up to about 2.0%w/w of any individual impurity.
  66. The composition of any one of claims 1-65, wherein the composition has a pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0.
  67. The composition of any one of claims 1-65, wherein the composition has a pH of from about 5.0 to about 8.0.
  68. The composition of any one of claims 1-62, wherein the composition has a pH of from about 6.5 to about 8.0.
  69. The composition of any one of claims 66-68, wherein the composition has a pH of from about 7.0 to about 8.0.
  70. A method of preparing the composition of any one of claims 1-69, comprising:
    (i) micronizing the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof;
    (ii) sterilizing the micronized compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof; and
    (iii) admixing a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof with the least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
  71. The method of claim 70, wherein a suspension comprising particles of the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is formed.
  72. The method of claim 70 or 71, wherein the sterilization is performed before the admixing.
  73. The method of claim 70 or 71, wherein the sterilization is performed after the admixing.
  74. The method of any one of claims 70-73, wherein the sterilization is performed at a temperature of about 121 ℃.
  75. The method of any one of claims 70-74, wherein the sterilization is performed for a period of from about 20 to about 30 minutes.
  76. A method for treating a disease or disorder associated with the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 1-69.
  77. The method of claim 76, wherein the disease or disorder associated with the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis is caused by an abnormity of VEGFR2.
  78. The method of claim 76, wherein the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis is ocular angiogenesis.
  79. The method of claim 76, wherein the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis is choroidal angiogenesis.
  80. The method according to claim 19, wherein the disease or disorder is wet macular degeneration, diabetic retinopathy or neovascular glaucoma, and the diseases associated with the abnormal proliferation of angiogenesis are wet macular degeneration, diabetic retinopathy or neovascular glaucoma.
  81. A method for treating a disease or disorder caused by the abnormal protein kinases, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 1-69.
  82. The method of claim 81, wherein the protein kinase is VEGFR2, PDGFR-β, KIT, AURORA-B, FGFR2, SRC, JAK2 or P38-α.
  83. The method of claim 82, wherein the protein kinase is VEGFR2, KIT or PDGFR-β.
  84. A method of treating or preventing a disorder or disease, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 1-69, wherein the disorder or disease is a neovascular disorder or disease, inflammatory disorder or disease, or a cancer.
  85. A method of treating or preventing an ophthalmic disorder or disease, comprising administering to an eye of a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 1-69.
  86. The method of claim 85, wherein the ophthalmic disorder or disease affects function, clarity, and/or structure of the lens of the eye.
  87. The method of claim 85, wherein the ophthalmic disorder or disease is wet macular degeneration, cataracts, presbyopia, nuclear sclerosis of the eye lens, Refsum disease, Smith-Lemli-Opitz syndrome (SLOS) , Schnyder crystalline corneal dystrophy (SCCD) , abetalipoproteinemia, familial hypobetalipoproteinemia, neovascularization, or cancer.
  88. The method of claim 87, wherein the neovascularization is corneal neovascularization, iris neovascularization, or choroidal neovascularization.
  89. The method of claim 88, wherein the ophthalmic disorder or disease is corneal neovascularization.
  90. The method of any one of claims 76-89, wherein the subject has undergone a surgical procedure for treatment of the ophthalmic disorder or disease.
  91. The method of any one of claims 76-90, wherein about 0.005 mg/mL to about 5.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
  92. The method of any one of claims 76-90, wherein about 0.01 mg/mL to about 4.0 mg/mL of a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , or an isotopic variant, tautomer, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof is administered to the eye of the subject.
  93. The method of any one of claims 76-92, wherein the composition is administered the subject once per day, twice per day, three times per day, or four times per day.
  94. The method of any one of claims 76-93, wherein the composition is administered the subject three times per day.
  95. The method of any one of claims 76-94, wherein the administration is topical or by injection.
PCT/CN2021/089415 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions Ceased WO2021213512A1 (en)

Priority Applications (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020227041397A KR102912349B1 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 Preparations for treating eye conditions
CN202180030232.XA CN115484957B (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 Preparations used to treat eye conditions
EP21792973.6A EP4138841B1 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions
US17/921,055 US20230301904A1 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 Formulation for Treating Ophthalmic Conditions
NZ794298A NZ794298B2 (en) 2021-04-23 A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions
CA3173676A CA3173676A1 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions
JP2022564239A JP7601903B2 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 Formulations for treating ophthalmic conditions
AU2021260669A AU2021260669B2 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions
JP2024163486A JP2025004026A (en) 2020-04-24 2024-09-20 Formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CNPCT/CN2020/086647 2020-04-24
CN2020086647 2020-04-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021213512A1 true WO2021213512A1 (en) 2021-10-28

Family

ID=78270298

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/089415 Ceased WO2021213512A1 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-23 A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (1) US20230301904A1 (en)
EP (1) EP4138841B1 (en)
JP (2) JP7601903B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102912349B1 (en)
CN (1) CN115484957B (en)
AU (1) AU2021260669B2 (en)
CA (1) CA3173676A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2021213512A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023143611A1 (en) * 2022-01-30 2023-08-03 兰泰克生物技术公司 Method for treating cancer
WO2024098043A3 (en) * 2022-11-04 2024-07-04 Qlaris Bio, Inc. Topical ocular delivery of cromakalim

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2985283A1 (en) 2013-04-09 2016-02-17 Guangzhou Hui Bo Rui Biological Pharmaceutical Technology Co., Ltd. Anti-angiogenesis compound, intermediate and use thereof

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI411607B (en) * 2005-11-14 2013-10-11 Vitae Pharmaceuticals Inc Aspartic protease inhibitors
US20120114637A1 (en) * 2009-05-04 2012-05-10 Santen Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Mtor pathway inhibitors for treating ocular disorders
PL3548091T3 (en) * 2016-11-29 2022-03-28 Oculis SA Preparation of solid cyclodextrin complexes for ophthalmic active pharmaceutical ingredient delivery

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2985283A1 (en) 2013-04-09 2016-02-17 Guangzhou Hui Bo Rui Biological Pharmaceutical Technology Co., Ltd. Anti-angiogenesis compound, intermediate and use thereof
US20170119768A1 (en) * 2013-04-09 2017-05-04 Guangzhou Kangrui Biological Pharmaceutical Technology Co., Ltd. Anti-angiogenesis compound, intermediate and use thereof

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4138841A4
SUN LI, XU YAN, WU MI: "Applications of Suspending Agents in Suspension Eye Drops", HEBEI CHEMICAL ENGINEERING AND INDUSTRY, vol. 32, no. 8, 31 August 2009 (2009-08-31), CN, pages 24 - 26, XP009531652, ISSN: 1003-5095 *

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023143611A1 (en) * 2022-01-30 2023-08-03 兰泰克生物技术公司 Method for treating cancer
WO2024098043A3 (en) * 2022-11-04 2024-07-04 Qlaris Bio, Inc. Topical ocular delivery of cromakalim
US20250108002A1 (en) * 2022-11-04 2025-04-03 Qlaris Bio, Inc. Topical ocular delivery of cromakalim
US20250108035A1 (en) * 2022-11-04 2025-04-03 Qlaris Bio, Inc. Topical ocular delivery of cromakalim
US12564573B2 (en) * 2022-11-04 2026-03-03 Qlaris Bio, Inc. Topical ocular delivery of cromakalim
US12564572B2 (en) * 2022-11-04 2026-03-03 Qlaris Bio, Inc. Topical ocular delivery of cromakalim

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20230301904A1 (en) 2023-09-28
AU2021260669A8 (en) 2023-01-05
EP4138841C0 (en) 2024-10-23
AU2021260669B2 (en) 2024-03-21
EP4138841A1 (en) 2023-03-01
AU2021260669A1 (en) 2022-12-15
NZ794298A (en) 2025-05-02
KR102912349B1 (en) 2026-01-13
JP2025004026A (en) 2025-01-14
CA3173676A1 (en) 2021-10-28
JP2023522743A (en) 2023-05-31
CN115484957A (en) 2022-12-16
EP4138841A4 (en) 2023-09-27
KR20230008148A (en) 2023-01-13
JP7601903B2 (en) 2024-12-17
EP4138841B1 (en) 2024-10-23
CN115484957B (en) 2024-06-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11896588B2 (en) Ophthalmic composition
US11052095B2 (en) D2O stabilized pharmaceutical formulations
EP4248971A2 (en) Compositions and methods of using nintedanib for treating ocular diseases with abnormal neovascularization
EA034839B1 (en) Ophthalmic solution
Alase Sustained ophthalmic delivery of gatifloxacin from in situ gelling system
JP2025004026A (en) Formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions
TWI495469B (en) Improved pharmaceutical compositions containing a fluoroquinolone antibiotic drug
US20250064725A1 (en) Ophthalmic preparation of tyrosine kinase inhibitor, and preparation method therefor and use thereof
CN110812323B (en) Ophthalmic composition, preparation method and application thereof
CN116570558B (en) Voriconazole ophthalmic nanometer slow-release composition and preparation method and application thereof
CN105708844A (en) Tobramycin and dexamethasone nanosuspension eye drop and preparation method thereof
HK40080964A (en) A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions
HK40080964B (en) A formulation for treating ophthalmic conditions
CN115364091A (en) Arteannuin derivative eye preparation and its preparing method
KR20230107624A (en) Ophthalmic composition containing levofloxacin and ketorolac, preparation method and use thereof
CN106714803A (en) Suspension preparation for instillation into eyes
US20150080385A1 (en) Ophthalmic pharmaceutical composition containing a carbonic anhydrase inhibitor and method for the preparation thereof
HK40100601A (en) Compositions and methods of using nintedanib for treating ocular diseases with abnormal neovascularization
CN116474105A (en) A pharmaceutical composition for preventing, alleviating or treating eye diseases, its preparation method and its application
HK40038382B (en) Process for the preparation of sterile ophthalmic aqueous fluticasone propionate form a nanocrystals suspensions
HK40038382A (en) Process for the preparation of sterile ophthalmic aqueous fluticasone propionate form a nanocrystals suspensions
NZ619229A (en) Topical ophthalmological pharmaceutical composition containing regorafenib
HK1233540B (en) Ophthalmic suspension formulation
TW201417818A (en) Triamcinolone acetonide ophthalmic preparation and preparation method thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21792973

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 3173676

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022564239

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20227041397

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021792973

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20221124

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021260669

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20210423

Kind code of ref document: A

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 794298

Country of ref document: NZ